Provided by: perl-doc_5.18.2-2ubuntu1.7_all bug

NAME

       perlapi - autogenerated documentation for the perl public API

DESCRIPTION

       This file contains the documentation of the perl public API generated by embed.pl, specifically a listing
       of functions, macros, flags, and variables that may be used by extension writers.  At the end is a list
       of functions which have yet to be documented.  The interfaces of those are subject to change without
       notice.  Any functions not listed here are not part of the public API, and should not be used by
       extension writers at all.  For these reasons, blindly using functions listed in proto.h is to be avoided
       when writing extensions.

       Note that all Perl API global variables must be referenced with the "PL_" prefix.  Some macros are
       provided for compatibility with the older, unadorned names, but this support may be disabled in a future
       release.

       Perl was originally written to handle US-ASCII only (that is characters whose ordinal numbers are in the
       range 0 - 127).  And documentation and comments may still use the term ASCII, when sometimes in fact the
       entire range from 0 - 255 is meant.

       Note that Perl can be compiled and run under EBCDIC (See perlebcdic) or ASCII.  Most of the documentation
       (and even comments in the code) ignore the EBCDIC possibility.  For almost all purposes the differences
       are transparent.  As an example, under EBCDIC, instead of UTF-8, UTF-EBCDIC is used to encode Unicode
       strings, and so whenever this documentation refers to "utf8" (and variants of that name, including in
       function names), it also (essentially transparently) means "UTF-EBCDIC".  But the ordinals of characters
       differ between ASCII, EBCDIC, and the UTF- encodings, and a string encoded in UTF-EBCDIC may occupy more
       bytes than in UTF-8.

       The listing below is alphabetical, case insensitive.

Gimme" Values

       GIMME   A  backward-compatible  version  of "GIMME_V" which can only return "G_SCALAR" or "G_ARRAY"; in a
               void context, it returns "G_SCALAR".  Deprecated.  Use "GIMME_V" instead.

                       U32     GIMME

       GIMME_V The XSUB-writer's equivalent to Perl's "wantarray".  Returns "G_VOID",  "G_SCALAR"  or  "G_ARRAY"
               for void, scalar or list context, respectively. See perlcall for a usage example.

                       U32     GIMME_V

       G_ARRAY Used to indicate list context.  See "GIMME_V", "GIMME" and perlcall.

       G_DISCARD
               Indicates that arguments returned from a callback should be discarded.  See perlcall.

       G_EVAL  Used to force a Perl "eval" wrapper around a callback.  See perlcall.

       G_NOARGS
               Indicates that no arguments are being sent to a callback.  See perlcall.

       G_SCALAR
               Used to indicate scalar context.  See "GIMME_V", "GIMME", and perlcall.

       G_VOID  Used to indicate void context.  See "GIMME_V" and perlcall.

Array Manipulation Functions

       AvFILL  Same as "av_top_index()".  Deprecated, use "av_top_index()" instead.

                       int     AvFILL(AV* av)

       av_clear
               Clears  an  array,  making  it  empty.  Does not free the memory the av uses to store its list of
               scalars.  If any destructors are triggered as a result, the av itself  may  be  freed  when  this
               function returns.

               Perl equivalent: "@myarray = ();".

                       void    av_clear(AV *av)

       av_create_and_push
               Push  an  SV onto the end of the array, creating the array if necessary.  A small internal helper
               function to remove a commonly duplicated idiom.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    av_create_and_push(AV **const avp,
                                                  SV *const val)

       av_create_and_unshift_one
               Unshifts an SV onto the beginning of the  array,  creating  the  array  if  necessary.   A  small
               internal helper function to remove a commonly duplicated idiom.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SV**    av_create_and_unshift_one(AV **const avp,
                                                         SV *const val)

       av_delete
               Deletes  the  element  indexed by "key" from the array, makes the element mortal, and returns it.
               If "flags" equals "G_DISCARD", the element is freed and null is returned.  Perl  equivalent:  "my
               $elem   =   delete($myarray[$idx]);"   for   the   non-"G_DISCARD"  version  and  a  void-context
               "delete($myarray[$idx]);" for the "G_DISCARD" version.

                       SV*     av_delete(AV *av, I32 key, I32 flags)

       av_exists
               Returns true if the element indexed by "key" has been initialized.

               This relies on the fact that uninitialized array elements are set to &PL_sv_undef.

               Perl equivalent: "exists($myarray[$key])".

                       bool    av_exists(AV *av, I32 key)

       av_extend
               Pre-extend an array.  The "key" is the index to which the array should be extended.

                       void    av_extend(AV *av, I32 key)

       av_fetch
               Returns the SV at the specified index in the array.  The "key" is the index.  If  lval  is  true,
               you  are  guaranteed  to  get  a real SV back (in case it wasn't real before), which you can then
               modify.  Check that the return value is non-null before dereferencing it to a "SV*".

               See "Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in perlguts for more information  on  how
               to use this function on tied arrays.

               The rough perl equivalent is $myarray[$idx].

                       SV**    av_fetch(AV *av, I32 key, I32 lval)

       av_fill Set the highest index in the array to the given number, equivalent to Perl's "$#array = $fill;".

               The  number of elements in the an array will be "fill + 1" after av_fill() returns.  If the array
               was previously shorter, then the additional elements appended are set to "PL_sv_undef".   If  the
               array  was  longer,  then  the  excess  elements  are  freed.   "av_fill(av,  -1)" is the same as
               "av_clear(av)".

                       void    av_fill(AV *av, I32 fill)

       av_len  Same as "av_top_index".  Returns the highest index in the array.  Note that the return  value  is
               +1  what  its name implies it returns; and hence differs in meaning from what the similarly named
               "sv_len" returns.

                       I32     av_len(AV *av)

       av_make Creates a new AV and populates it with a list of SVs.  The SVs are copied into the array, so they
               may be freed after the call to av_make.  The new AV will have a reference count of 1.

               Perl equivalent: "my @new_array = ($scalar1, $scalar2, $scalar3...);"

                       AV*     av_make(I32 size, SV **strp)

       av_pop  Removes one SV from the end of the  array,  reducing  its  size  by  one  and  returning  the  SV
               (transferring  control  of one reference count) to the caller.  Returns &PL_sv_undef if the array
               is empty.

               Perl equivalent: "pop(@myarray);"

                       SV*     av_pop(AV *av)

       av_push Pushes an SV onto the end of the array.  The array will grow  automatically  to  accommodate  the
               addition.  This takes ownership of one reference count.

               Perl equivalent: "push @myarray, $elem;".

                       void    av_push(AV *av, SV *val)

       av_shift
               Shifts an SV off the beginning of the array.  Returns &PL_sv_undef if the array is empty.

               Perl equivalent: "shift(@myarray);"

                       SV*     av_shift(AV *av)

       av_store
               Stores  an SV in an array.  The array index is specified as "key".  The return value will be NULL
               if the operation failed or if the value did not need to be actually stored within the  array  (as
               in  the  case of tied arrays). Otherwise, it can be dereferenced to get the "SV*" that was stored
               there (= "val")).

               Note that the caller is responsible for suitably incrementing the reference count of "val" before
               the call, and decrementing it if the function returned NULL.

               Approximate Perl equivalent: "$myarray[$key] = $val;".

               See "Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in perlguts for more information  on  how
               to use this function on tied arrays.

                       SV**    av_store(AV *av, I32 key, SV *val)

       av_tindex
               Same as "av_top_index()".

                       int     av_tindex(AV* av)

       av_top_index
               Returns the highest index in the array.  The number of elements in the array is "av_top_index(av)
               + 1".  Returns -1 if the array is empty.

               The Perl equivalent for this is $#myarray.

               (A slightly shorter form is "av_tindex".)

                       I32     av_top_index(AV *av)

       av_undef
               Undefines  the  array.   Frees  the  memory  used by the av to store its list of scalars.  If any
               destructors are triggered as a result, the av itself may be freed.

                       void    av_undef(AV *av)

       av_unshift
               Unshift the given number of "undef" values onto the beginning of the array.  The array will  grow
               automatically  to  accommodate  the  addition.   You must then use "av_store" to assign values to
               these new elements.

               Perl equivalent: "unshift @myarray, ( (undef) x $n );"

                       void    av_unshift(AV *av, I32 num)

       get_av  Returns the AV of the specified Perl global or package array with the given  name  (so  it  won't
               work  on lexical variables).  "flags" are passed to "gv_fetchpv". If "GV_ADD" is set and the Perl
               variable does not exist then it will be created.  If "flags" is zero and the  variable  does  not
               exist then NULL is returned.

               Perl equivalent: "@{"$name"}".

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       AV*     get_av(const char *name, I32 flags)

       newAV   Creates a new AV.  The reference count is set to 1.

               Perl equivalent: "my @array;".

                       AV*     newAV()

       sortsv  Sort an array. Here is an example:

                   sortsv(AvARRAY(av), av_top_index(av)+1, Perl_sv_cmp_locale);

               Currently this always uses mergesort. See sortsv_flags for a more flexible routine.

                       void    sortsv(SV** array, size_t num_elts,
                                      SVCOMPARE_t cmp)

       sortsv_flags
               Sort an array, with various options.

                       void    sortsv_flags(SV** array, size_t num_elts,
                                            SVCOMPARE_t cmp, U32 flags)

Callback Functions

       call_argv
               Performs  a  callback  to  the  specified named and package-scoped Perl subroutine with "argv" (a
               NULL-terminated array of strings) as arguments. See perlcall.

               Approximate Perl equivalent: "&{"$sub_name"}(@$argv)".

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       I32     call_argv(const char* sub_name, I32 flags,
                                         char** argv)

       call_method
               Performs a callback to the specified Perl method.  The blessed object must be on the stack.   See
               perlcall.

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       I32     call_method(const char* methname, I32 flags)

       call_pv Performs a callback to the specified Perl sub.  See perlcall.

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       I32     call_pv(const char* sub_name, I32 flags)

       call_sv Performs a callback to the Perl sub whose name is in the SV.  See perlcall.

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       I32     call_sv(SV* sv, VOL I32 flags)

       ENTER   Opening bracket on a callback.  See "LEAVE" and perlcall.

                               ENTER;

       eval_pv Tells Perl to "eval" the given string and return an SV* result.

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       SV*     eval_pv(const char* p, I32 croak_on_error)

       eval_sv Tells  Perl  to  "eval"  the  string in the SV. It supports the same flags as "call_sv", with the
               obvious exception of G_EVAL. See perlcall.

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       I32     eval_sv(SV* sv, I32 flags)

       FREETMPS
               Closing bracket for temporaries on a callback.  See "SAVETMPS" and perlcall.

                               FREETMPS;

       LEAVE   Closing bracket on a callback.  See "ENTER" and perlcall.

                               LEAVE;

       SAVETMPS
               Opening bracket for temporaries on a callback.  See "FREETMPS" and perlcall.

                               SAVETMPS;

Character case changing

       toLOWER Converts the specified character to lowercase, if possible; otherwise returns the input character
               itself.

                       char    toLOWER(char ch)

       toUPPER Converts the specified character to uppercase, if possible; otherwise returns the input character
               itself.

                       char    toUPPER(char ch)

Character classes

       This section is about functions (really macros) that classify characters into types, such as  punctuation
       versus  alphabetic,  etc.   Most  of  these  are analogous to regular expression character classes.  (See
       "POSIX Character Classes" in perlrecharclass.)  There are several variants  for  each  class.   (Not  all
       macros  have  all  variants;  each  item  below  lists the ones valid for it.)  None are affected by "use
       bytes", and only the ones with "LC" in the name are affected by the current locale.

       The base function, e.g., "isALPHA()", takes an octet (either a "char" or a "U8") as input and  returns  a
       boolean  as  to  whether  or  not  the character represented by that octet is (or on non-ASCII platforms,
       corresponds to) an ASCII character in the named class based on platform, Unicode, and Perl rules.  If the
       input is a number that doesn't fit in an octet, FALSE is returned.

       Variant "isFOO_A" (e.g., "isALPHA_A()") is identical to the base function with no suffix "_A".

       Variant "isFOO_L1" imposes the Latin-1 (or EBCDIC equivlalent) character set onto the platform.  That is,
       the code points that are ASCII are unaffected, since ASCII is a subset of  Latin-1.   But  the  non-ASCII
       code  points  are  treated as if they are Latin-1 characters.  For example, "isWORDCHAR_L1()" will return
       true when called with the code point 0xDF, which is a word character in both ASCII and EBCDIC (though  it
       represent different characters in each).

       Variant  "isFOO_uni" is like the "isFOO_L1" variant, but accepts any UV code point as input.  If the code
       point is larger than 255, Unicode rules are used to determine if it  is  in  the  character  class.   For
       example,  "isWORDCHAR_uni(0x100)"  returns  TRUE,  since  0x100  is LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH MACRON in
       Unicode, and is a word character.

       Variant "isFOO_utf8" is like "isFOO_uni", but the input is a pointer to a (known to be well-formed) UTF-8
       encoded string ("U8*" or "char*").  The classification of just the first (possibly multi-byte)  character
       in the string is tested.

       Variant  "isFOO_LC"  is  like the "isFOO_A" and "isFOO_L1" variants, but uses the C library function that
       gives the named classification instead of hard-coded rules.   For  example,  "isDIGIT_LC()"  returns  the
       result  of calling "isdigit()".  This means that the result is based on the current locale, which is what
       "LC" in the name stands for.  FALSE is always returned if the input won't fit into an octet.

       Variant "isFOO_LC_uvchr" is like "isFOO_LC", but is defined on any UV.  It returns the same as "isFOO_LC"
       for input code points less than 256, and returns the hard-coded, not-affected-by-locale, Unicode  results
       for larger ones.

       Variant  "isFOO_LC_utf8"  is  like  "isFOO_LC_uvchr",  but the input is a pointer to a (known to be well-
       formed) UTF-8 encoded string ("U8*" or "char*").  The classification of just the first  (possibly  multi-
       byte) character in the string is tested.

       isALPHA Returns  a  boolean  indicating  whether  the  specified  character  is  an alphabetic character,
               analogous to "m/[[:alpha:]]/".  See the top of  this  section  for  an  explanation  of  variants
               "isALPHA_A",  "isALPHA_L1",  "isALPHA_uni", "isALPHA_utf8", "isALPHA_LC", "isALPHA_LC_uvchr", and
               "isALPHA_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isALPHA(char ch)

       isALPHANUMERIC
               Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a either an alphabetic  character
               or  decimal digit, analogous to "m/[[:alnum:]]/".  See the top of this section for an explanation
               of variants "isALPHANUMERIC_A", "isALPHANUMERIC_L1", "isALPHANUMERIC_uni", "isALPHANUMERIC_utf8",
               "isALPHANUMERIC_LC", "isALPHANUMERIC_LC_uvchr", and "isALPHANUMERIC_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isALPHANUMERIC(char ch)

       isASCII Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is one of the 128 characters in  the
               ASCII  character set, analogous to "m/[[:ascii:]]/".  On non-ASCII platforms, it returns TRUE iff
               this character corresponds to an ASCII character.  Variants "isASCII_A()" and "isASCII_L1()"  are
               identical  to  "isASCII()".   See  the  top  of  this  section  for  an  explanation  of variants
               "isASCII_uni", "isASCII_utf8", "isASCII_LC", "isASCII_LC_uvchr",  and  "isASCII_LC_utf8".   Note,
               however,  that some platforms do not have the C library routine "isascii()".  In these cases, the
               variants whose names contain "LC" are the same as the corresponding ones without.

                       bool    isASCII(char ch)

       isBLANK Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a character considered  to  be  a
               blank, analogous to "m/[[:blank:]]/".  See the top of this section for an explanation of variants
               "isBLANK_A",  "isBLANK_L1",  "isBLANK_uni", "isBLANK_utf8", "isBLANK_LC", "isBLANK_LC_uvchr", and
               "isBLANK_LC_utf8".  Note, however, that  some  platforms  do  not  have  the  C  library  routine
               "isblank()".   In  these  cases,  the  variants  whose  names  contain  "LC"  are the same as the
               corresponding ones without.

                       bool    isBLANK(char ch)

       isCNTRL Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a control character, analogous to
               "m/[[:cntrl:]]/".  See the top of this  section  for  an  explanation  of  variants  "isCNTRL_A",
               "isCNTRL_L1",    "isCNTRL_uni",    "isCNTRL_utf8",    "isCNTRL_LC",    "isCNTRL_LC_uvchr",    and
               "isCNTRL_LC_utf8" On EBCDIC platforms, you almost always want to use the "isCNTRL_L1" variant.

                       bool    isCNTRL(char ch)

       isDIGIT Returns  a  boolean  indicating  whether  the  specified  character  is  a  digit,  analogous  to
               "m/[[:digit:]]/".  Variants "isDIGIT_A" and "isDIGIT_L1" are identical to "isDIGIT".  See the top
               of  this  section  for  an  explanation  of variants "isDIGIT_uni", "isDIGIT_utf8", "isDIGIT_LC",
               "isDIGIT_LC_uvchr", and "isDIGIT_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isDIGIT(char ch)

       isGRAPH Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a graphic character, analogous to
               "m/[[:graph:]]/".  See the top of this  section  for  an  explanation  of  variants  "isGRAPH_A",
               "isGRAPH_L1",    "isGRAPH_uni",    "isGRAPH_utf8",    "isGRAPH_LC",    "isGRAPH_LC_uvchr",    and
               "isGRAPH_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isGRAPH(char ch)

       isIDCONT
               Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character can  be  the  second  or  succeeding
               character  of  an  identifier.   This  is  very  close to, but not quite the same as the official
               Unicode property "XID_Continue".  The difference is that this returns  true  only  if  the  input
               character  also matches "isWORDCHAR".  See the top of this section for an explanation of variants
               "isIDCONT_A", "isIDCONT_L1", "isIDCONT_uni", "isIDCONT_utf8", "isIDCONT_LC", "isIDCONT_LC_uvchr",
               and "isIDCONT_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isIDCONT(char ch)

       isIDFIRST
               Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character can be the  first  character  of  an
               identifier.   This  is  very  close  to,  but not quite the same as the official Unicode property
               "XID_Start".  The difference is that this returns true only if the input character  also  matches
               "isWORDCHAR".   See  the  top  of  this  section  for  an  explanation of variants "isIDFIRST_A",
               "isIDFIRST_L1",  "isIDFIRST_uni",  "isIDFIRST_utf8",  "isIDFIRST_LC",  "isIDFIRST_LC_uvchr",  and
               "isIDFIRST_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isIDFIRST(char ch)

       isLOWER Returns  a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a lowercase character, analogous
               to "m/[[:lower:]]/".  See the top of this section for an  explanation  of  variants  "isLOWER_A",
               "isLOWER_L1",    "isLOWER_uni",    "isLOWER_utf8",    "isLOWER_LC",    "isLOWER_LC_uvchr",    and
               "isLOWER_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isLOWER(char ch)

       isOCTAL Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is an octal digit, [0-7].  The  only
               two variants are "isOCTAL_A" and "isOCTAL_L1"; each is identical to "isOCTAL".

                       bool    isOCTAL(char ch)

       isPRINT Returns  a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a printable character, analogous
               to "m/[[:print:]]/".  See the top of this section for an  explanation  of  variants  "isPRINT_A",
               "isPRINT_L1",    "isPRINT_uni",    "isPRINT_utf8",    "isPRINT_LC",    "isPRINT_LC_uvchr",    and
               "isPRINT_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isPRINT(char ch)

       isPSXSPC
               (short for Posix Space) Starting in 5.18, this is identical (experimentally) in all its forms  to
               the corresponding "isSPACE()" macros.  ("Experimentally" means that this change may be backed out
               in  5.20  or  5.22  if  field experience indicates that it was unwise.)  The locale forms of this
               macro are identical to their corresponding "isSPACE()" forms in all Perl releases.   In  releases
               prior  to  5.18,  the  non-locale  forms  differ  from  their  "isSPACE()" forms only in that the
               "isSPACE()" forms don't match a Vertical Tab, and the "isPSXSPC()" forms do.  Otherwise they  are
               identical.   Thus  this  macro  is  analogous  to  what  "m/[[:space:]]/"  matches  in  a regular
               expression.   See  the  top  of  this  section  for  an  explanation  of  variants  "isPSXSPC_A",
               "isPSXSPC_L1",   "isPSXSPC_uni",   "isPSXSPC_utf8",   "isPSXSPC_LC",   "isPSXSPC_LC_uvchr",   and
               "isPSXSPC_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isPSXSPC(char ch)

       isPUNCT Returns a boolean  indicating  whether  the  specified  character  is  a  punctuation  character,
               analogous  to  "m/[[:punct:]]/".   Note  that  the  definition  of  what  is punctuation isn't as
               straightforward as one might desire.   See  "POSIX  Character  Classes"  in  perlrecharclass  for
               details.   See  the top of this section for an explanation of variants "isPUNCT_A", "isPUNCT_L1",
               "isPUNCT_uni", "isPUNCT_utf8", "isPUNCT_LC", "isPUNCT_LC_uvchr", and "isPUNCT_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isPUNCT(char ch)

       isSPACE Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is a whitespace character.  This  is
               analogous   to   what   "m/\s/"   matches  in  a  regular  expression.   Starting  in  Perl  5.18
               (experimentally), this also matches what "m/[[:space:]]/"  does.   ("Experimentally"  means  that
               this  change may be backed out in 5.20 or 5.22 if field experience indicates that it was unwise.)
               Prior to 5.18, only the locale forms of this macro (the ones with "LC" in  their  names)  matched
               precisely  what "m/[[:space:]]/" does.  In those releases, the only difference, in the non-locale
               variants, was that "isSPACE()" did not match a vertical tab.  (See "isPSXSPC" for  a  macro  that
               matches  a  vertical  tab  in  all  releases.)  See the top of this section for an explanation of
               variants    "isSPACE_A",    "isSPACE_L1",    "isSPACE_uni",     "isSPACE_utf8",     "isSPACE_LC",
               "isSPACE_LC_uvchr", and "isSPACE_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isSPACE(char ch)

       isUPPER Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is an uppercase character, analogous
               to  "m/[[:upper:]]/".   See  the  top of this section for an explanation of variants "isUPPER_A",
               "isUPPER_L1",    "isUPPER_uni",    "isUPPER_utf8",    "isUPPER_LC",    "isUPPER_LC_uvchr",    and
               "isUPPER_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isUPPER(char ch)

       isWORDCHAR
               Returns  a  boolean  indicating  whether  the  specified  character is a character that is a word
               character, analogous to what "m/\w/" and "m/[[:word:]]/" match in a regular expression.   A  word
               character  is  an alphabetic character, a decimal digit, a connecting punctuation character (such
               as an underscore), or a "mark" character that attaches  to  one  of  those  (like  some  sort  of
               accent).   "isALNUM()"  is  a  synonym  provided  for  backward compatibility, even though a word
               character includes more than the standard C language meaning of alphanumeric.   See  the  top  of
               this  section  for  an explanation of variants "isWORDCHAR_A", "isWORDCHAR_L1", "isWORDCHAR_uni",
               "isWORDCHAR_utf8", "isWORDCHAR_LC", "isWORDCHAR_LC_uvchr", and "isWORDCHAR_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isWORDCHAR(char ch)

       isXDIGIT
               Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified character is  a  hexadecimal  digit.   In  the
               ASCII  range  these are "[0-9A-Fa-f]".  Variants "isXDIGIT_A()" and "isXDIGIT_L1()" are identical
               to "isXDIGIT()".  See the top of this section for  an  explanation  of  variants  "isXDIGIT_uni",
               "isXDIGIT_utf8", "isXDIGIT_LC", "isXDIGIT_LC_uvchr", and "isXDIGIT_LC_utf8".

                       bool    isXDIGIT(char ch)

Cloning an interpreter

       perl_clone
               Create and return a new interpreter by cloning the current one.

               perl_clone takes these flags as parameters:

               CLONEf_COPY_STACKS  -  is  used to, well, copy the stacks also, without it we only clone the data
               and zero the stacks, with it we copy the stacks and the new perl interpreter is ready to  run  at
               the  exact  same  point  as  the  previous  one.  The pseudo-fork code uses COPY_STACKS while the
               threads->create doesn't.

               CLONEf_KEEP_PTR_TABLE - perl_clone keeps a ptr_table with the pointer of the old  variable  as  a
               key and the new variable as a value, this allows it to check if something has been cloned and not
               clone it again but rather just use the value and increase the refcount.  If KEEP_PTR_TABLE is not
               set  then  perl_clone  will  kill the ptr_table using the function "ptr_table_free(PL_ptr_table);
               PL_ptr_table = NULL;", reason to keep it around is if you want to dup some of your  own  variable
               who are outside the graph perl scans, example of this code is in threads.xs create.

               CLONEf_CLONE_HOST  -  This is a win32 thing, it is ignored on unix, it tells perls win32host code
               (which is c++) to clone itself, this is needed on win32 if you want to run  two  threads  at  the
               same  time,  if  you  just want to do some stuff in a separate perl interpreter and then throw it
               away and return to the original one, you don't need to do anything.

                       PerlInterpreter* perl_clone(
                                            PerlInterpreter *proto_perl,
                                            UV flags
                                        )

Compile-time scope hooks

       BhkDISABLE
               Temporarily disable an entry in this BHK structure, by clearing the appropriate flag. which is  a
               preprocessor token indicating which entry to disable.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    BhkDISABLE(BHK *hk, which)

       BhkENABLE
               Re-enable  an  entry  in  this  BHK  structure,  by  setting  the  appropriate  flag.  which is a
               preprocessor token indicating which entry to enable.  This will assert (under -DDEBUGGING) if the
               entry doesn't contain a valid pointer.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    BhkENABLE(BHK *hk, which)

       BhkENTRY_set
               Set an entry in the BHK structure, and set the  flags  to  indicate  it  is  valid.  which  is  a
               preprocessing token indicating which entry to set.  The type of ptr depends on the entry.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    BhkENTRY_set(BHK *hk, which, void *ptr)

       blockhook_register
               Register  a  set  of  hooks to be called when the Perl lexical scope changes at compile time. See
               "Compile-time scope hooks" in perlguts.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

               NOTE: this function must be explicitly called as Perl_blockhook_register with an aTHX_ parameter.

                       void    Perl_blockhook_register(pTHX_ BHK *hk)

COP Hint Hashes

       cophh_2hv
               Generates and returns a standard Perl hash representing the full set of key/value  pairs  in  the
               cop hints hash cophh.  flags is currently unused and must be zero.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       HV *    cophh_2hv(const COPHH *cophh, U32 flags)

       cophh_copy
               Make and return a complete copy of the cop hints hash cophh.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       COPHH * cophh_copy(COPHH *cophh)

       cophh_delete_pv
               Like "cophh_delete_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       COPHH * cophh_delete_pv(const COPHH *cophh,
                                               const char *key, U32 hash,
                                               U32 flags)

       cophh_delete_pvn
               Delete  a  key  and  its associated value from the cop hints hash cophh, and returns the modified
               hash.  The returned hash pointer is in general not the same as the hash pointer that  was  passed
               in.   The  input hash is consumed by the function, and the pointer to it must not be subsequently
               used.  Use "cophh_copy" if you need both hashes.

               The key is specified by keypv and keylen.  If flags has the "COPHH_KEY_UTF8"  bit  set,  the  key
               octets  are  interpreted  as  UTF-8,  otherwise  they  are  interpreted  as  Latin-1.   hash is a
               precomputed hash of the key string, or zero if it has not been precomputed.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       COPHH * cophh_delete_pvn(COPHH *cophh,
                                                const char *keypv,
                                                STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
                                                U32 flags)

       cophh_delete_pvs
               Like "cophh_delete_pvn", but takes a literal string instead  of  a  string/length  pair,  and  no
               precomputed hash.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       COPHH * cophh_delete_pvs(const COPHH *cophh,
                                                const char *key, U32 flags)

       cophh_delete_sv
               Like "cophh_delete_pvn", but takes a Perl scalar instead of a string/length pair.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       COPHH * cophh_delete_sv(const COPHH *cophh, SV *key,
                                               U32 hash, U32 flags)

       cophh_fetch_pv
               Like "cophh_fetch_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SV *    cophh_fetch_pv(const COPHH *cophh,
                                              const char *key, U32 hash,
                                              U32 flags)

       cophh_fetch_pvn
               Look  up  the  entry  in the cop hints hash cophh with the key specified by keypv and keylen.  If
               flags has the "COPHH_KEY_UTF8" bit set, the key octets are interpreted as UTF-8,  otherwise  they
               are  interpreted as Latin-1.  hash is a precomputed hash of the key string, or zero if it has not
               been precomputed.  Returns a mortal scalar  copy  of  the  value  associated  with  the  key,  or
               &PL_sv_placeholder if there is no value associated with the key.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SV *    cophh_fetch_pvn(const COPHH *cophh,
                                               const char *keypv,
                                               STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
                                               U32 flags)

       cophh_fetch_pvs
               Like  "cophh_fetch_pvn",  but  takes  a  literal  string  instead of a string/length pair, and no
               precomputed hash.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SV *    cophh_fetch_pvs(const COPHH *cophh,
                                               const char *key, U32 flags)

       cophh_fetch_sv
               Like "cophh_fetch_pvn", but takes a Perl scalar instead of a string/length pair.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SV *    cophh_fetch_sv(const COPHH *cophh, SV *key,
                                              U32 hash, U32 flags)

       cophh_free
               Discard the cop hints hash cophh, freeing all resources associated with it.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    cophh_free(COPHH *cophh)

       cophh_new_empty
               Generate and return a fresh cop hints hash containing no entries.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       COPHH * cophh_new_empty()

       cophh_store_pv
               Like "cophh_store_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       COPHH * cophh_store_pv(const COPHH *cophh,
                                              const char *key, U32 hash,
                                              SV *value, U32 flags)

       cophh_store_pvn
               Stores a value, associated with a key, in the cop hints hash  cophh,  and  returns  the  modified
               hash.   The  returned hash pointer is in general not the same as the hash pointer that was passed
               in.  The input hash is consumed by the function, and the pointer to it must not  be  subsequently
               used.  Use "cophh_copy" if you need both hashes.

               The  key  is  specified  by keypv and keylen.  If flags has the "COPHH_KEY_UTF8" bit set, the key
               octets are interpreted  as  UTF-8,  otherwise  they  are  interpreted  as  Latin-1.   hash  is  a
               precomputed hash of the key string, or zero if it has not been precomputed.

               value  is  the  scalar value to store for this key.  value is copied by this function, which thus
               does not take ownership of any reference to it, and later changes  to  the  scalar  will  not  be
               reflected in the value visible in the cop hints hash.  Complex types of scalar will not be stored
               with referential integrity, but will be coerced to strings.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       COPHH * cophh_store_pvn(COPHH *cophh, const char *keypv,
                                               STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
                                               SV *value, U32 flags)

       cophh_store_pvs
               Like  "cophh_store_pvn",  but  takes  a  literal  string  instead of a string/length pair, and no
               precomputed hash.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       COPHH * cophh_store_pvs(const COPHH *cophh,
                                               const char *key, SV *value,
                                               U32 flags)

       cophh_store_sv
               Like "cophh_store_pvn", but takes a Perl scalar instead of a string/length pair.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       COPHH * cophh_store_sv(const COPHH *cophh, SV *key,
                                              U32 hash, SV *value, U32 flags)

COP Hint Reading

       cop_hints_2hv
               Generates and returns a standard Perl hash representing the full set of hint entries in  the  cop
               cop.  flags is currently unused and must be zero.

                       HV *    cop_hints_2hv(const COP *cop, U32 flags)

       cop_hints_fetch_pv
               Like "cop_hints_fetch_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.

                       SV *    cop_hints_fetch_pv(const COP *cop,
                                                  const char *key, U32 hash,
                                                  U32 flags)

       cop_hints_fetch_pvn
               Look  up  the hint entry in the cop cop with the key specified by keypv and keylen.  If flags has
               the "COPHH_KEY_UTF8" bit set, the key  octets  are  interpreted  as  UTF-8,  otherwise  they  are
               interpreted as Latin-1.  hash is a precomputed hash of the key string, or zero if it has not been
               precomputed.    Returns  a  mortal  scalar  copy  of  the  value  associated  with  the  key,  or
               &PL_sv_placeholder if there is no value associated with the key.

                       SV *    cop_hints_fetch_pvn(const COP *cop,
                                                   const char *keypv,
                                                   STRLEN keylen, U32 hash,
                                                   U32 flags)

       cop_hints_fetch_pvs
               Like "cop_hints_fetch_pvn", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length  pair,  and  no
               precomputed hash.

                       SV *    cop_hints_fetch_pvs(const COP *cop,
                                                   const char *key, U32 flags)

       cop_hints_fetch_sv
               Like "cop_hints_fetch_pvn", but takes a Perl scalar instead of a string/length pair.

                       SV *    cop_hints_fetch_sv(const COP *cop, SV *key,
                                                  U32 hash, U32 flags)

Custom Operators

       custom_op_register
               Register a custom op. See "Custom Operators" in perlguts.

               NOTE: this function must be explicitly called as Perl_custom_op_register with an aTHX_ parameter.

                       void    Perl_custom_op_register(pTHX_
                                                       Perl_ppaddr_t ppaddr,
                                                       const XOP *xop)

       custom_op_xop
               Return  the  XOP  structure for a given custom op. This function should be considered internal to
               OP_NAME and the other access macros: use them instead.

               NOTE: this function must be explicitly called as Perl_custom_op_xop with an aTHX_ parameter.

                       const XOP * Perl_custom_op_xop(pTHX_ const OP *o)

       XopDISABLE
               Temporarily disable a member of the XOP, by clearing the appropriate flag.

                       void    XopDISABLE(XOP *xop, which)

       XopENABLE
               Reenable a member of the XOP which has been disabled.

                       void    XopENABLE(XOP *xop, which)

       XopENTRY
               Return a member of the XOP structure. which is a cpp token indicating which entry to  return.  If
               the member is not set this will return a default value. The return type depends on which.

                               XopENTRY(XOP *xop, which)

       XopENTRY_set
               Set  a  member  of  the  XOP  structure.  which is a cpp token indicating which entry to set. See
               "Custom Operators" in perlguts for details about the available members and how they are used.

                       void    XopENTRY_set(XOP *xop, which, value)

       XopFLAGS
               Return the XOP's flags.

                       U32     XopFLAGS(XOP *xop)

CV Manipulation Functions

       CvSTASH Returns the stash of the CV. A stash is the symbol  table  hash,  containing  the  package-scoped
               variables in the package where the subroutine was defined.  For more information, see perlguts.

               This also has a special use with XS AUTOLOAD subs.  See "Autoloading with XSUBs" in perlguts.

                       HV*     CvSTASH(CV* cv)

       get_cv  Uses "strlen" to get the length of "name", then calls "get_cvn_flags".

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       CV*     get_cv(const char* name, I32 flags)

       get_cvn_flags
               Returns  the  CV of the specified Perl subroutine.  "flags" are passed to "gv_fetchpvn_flags". If
               "GV_ADD" is set and the Perl subroutine does not exist then it will be declared  (which  has  the
               same  effect  as  saying  "sub name;").  If "GV_ADD" is not set and the subroutine does not exist
               then NULL is returned.

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       CV*     get_cvn_flags(const char* name, STRLEN len,
                                             I32 flags)

Embedding Functions

       cv_clone
               Clone a CV, making a lexical closure.  proto supplies the prototype of the  function:  its  code,
               pad  structure, and other attributes.  The prototype is combined with a capture of outer lexicals
               to which the  code  refers,  which  are  taken  from  the  currently-executing  instance  of  the
               immediately surrounding code.

                       CV *    cv_clone(CV *proto)

       cv_undef
               Clear  out all the active components of a CV. This can happen either by an explicit "undef &foo",
               or by the reference count going to zero.  In the former case, we keep the CvOUTSIDE  pointer,  so
               that any anonymous children can still follow the full lexical scope chain.

                       void    cv_undef(CV* cv)

       find_rundefsv
               Find  and  return  the  variable that is named $_ in the lexical scope of the currently-executing
               function.  This may be a lexical $_, or will otherwise be the global one.

                       SV *    find_rundefsv()

       find_rundefsvoffset
               Find the position of the lexical $_ in the pad of the currently-executing function.  Returns  the
               offset  in the current pad, or "NOT_IN_PAD" if there is no lexical $_ in scope (in which case the
               global one should be used instead).  "find_rundefsv" is likely to be more convenient.

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       PADOFFSET find_rundefsvoffset()

       load_module
               Loads the module whose name is pointed to by the string part  of  name.   Note  that  the  actual
               module  name,  not its filename, should be given.  Eg, "Foo::Bar" instead of "Foo/Bar.pm".  flags
               can be any of PERL_LOADMOD_DENY, PERL_LOADMOD_NOIMPORT, or PERL_LOADMOD_IMPORT_OPS (or 0  for  no
               flags).  ver,  if  specified  and  not  NULL, provides version semantics similar to "use Foo::Bar
               VERSION".  The optional trailing SV* arguments can be used to specify arguments to  the  module's
               import()  method,  similar  to "use Foo::Bar VERSION LIST".  They must be terminated with a final
               NULL pointer.  Note that this list can only be omitted when the  PERL_LOADMOD_NOIMPORT  flag  has
               been  used.   Otherwise  at  least  a single NULL pointer to designate the default import list is
               required.

               The reference count for each specified "SV*" parameter is decremented.

                       void    load_module(U32 flags, SV* name, SV* ver, ...)

       nothreadhook
               Stub that provides thread hook for perl_destruct when there are no threads.

                       int     nothreadhook()

       pad_add_anon
               Allocates a place in the currently-compiling pad (via "pad_alloc") for an anonymous function that
               is lexically scoped inside the currently-compiling function.  The function func  is  linked  into
               the pad, and its "CvOUTSIDE" link to the outer scope is weakened to avoid a reference loop.

               One reference count is stolen, so you may need to do "SvREFCNT_inc(func)".

               optype  should  be  an  opcode indicating the type of operation that the pad entry is to support.
               This doesn't affect operational semantics, but is used for debugging.

                       PADOFFSET pad_add_anon(CV *func, I32 optype)

       pad_add_name_pv
               Exactly like "pad_add_name_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated string  instead  of  a  string/length
               pair.

                       PADOFFSET pad_add_name_pv(const char *name, U32 flags,
                                                 HV *typestash, HV *ourstash)

       pad_add_name_pvn
               Allocates  a  place in the currently-compiling pad for a named lexical variable.  Stores the name
               and other metadata in the name part of the pad, and makes preparations to manage  the  variable's
               lexical scoping.  Returns the offset of the allocated pad slot.

               namepv/namelen  specify  the variable's name, including leading sigil.  If typestash is non-null,
               the name is for a typed lexical, and this identifies the type.  If ourstash is non-null,  it's  a
               lexical  reference  to  a package variable, and this identifies the package.  The following flags
               can be OR'ed together:

                   padadd_OUR          redundantly specifies if it's a package var
                   padadd_STATE        variable will retain value persistently
                   padadd_NO_DUP_CHECK skip check for lexical shadowing

                       PADOFFSET pad_add_name_pvn(const char *namepv,
                                                  STRLEN namelen, U32 flags,
                                                  HV *typestash, HV *ourstash)

       pad_add_name_sv
               Exactly like "pad_add_name_pvn", but takes the name string in the form of  an  SV  instead  of  a
               string/length pair.

                       PADOFFSET pad_add_name_sv(SV *name, U32 flags,
                                                 HV *typestash, HV *ourstash)

       pad_alloc
               Allocates a place in the currently-compiling pad, returning the offset of the allocated pad slot.
               No  name is initially attached to the pad slot.  tmptype is a set of flags indicating the kind of
               pad entry required, which will be set in the value SV for the allocated pad entry:

                   SVs_PADMY    named lexical variable ("my", "our", "state")
                   SVs_PADTMP   unnamed temporary store

               optype should be an opcode indicating the type of operation that the pad  entry  is  to  support.
               This doesn't affect operational semantics, but is used for debugging.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       PADOFFSET pad_alloc(I32 optype, U32 tmptype)

       pad_compname_type
               Looks  up the type of the lexical variable at position po in the currently-compiling pad.  If the
               variable is typed, the stash of the class to which it is typed is returned.  If  not,  "NULL"  is
               returned.

                       HV *    pad_compname_type(PADOFFSET po)

       pad_findmy_pv
               Exactly like "pad_findmy_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.

                       PADOFFSET pad_findmy_pv(const char *name, U32 flags)

       pad_findmy_pvn
               Given  the  name  of  a  lexical  variable,  find  its  position  in the currently-compiling pad.
               namepv/namelen specify the variable's name, including leading sigil.  flags is reserved and  must
               be  zero.   If  it  is  not  in the current pad but appears in the pad of any lexically enclosing
               scope, then a pseudo-entry for it is added in the current pad.  Returns the offset in the current
               pad, or "NOT_IN_PAD" if no such lexical is in scope.

                       PADOFFSET pad_findmy_pvn(const char *namepv,
                                                STRLEN namelen, U32 flags)

       pad_findmy_sv
               Exactly like "pad_findmy_pvn", but takes the name string in the  form  of  an  SV  instead  of  a
               string/length pair.

                       PADOFFSET pad_findmy_sv(SV *name, U32 flags)

       pad_setsv
               Set  the  value  at  offset  po  in  the  current  (compiling  or  executing) pad.  Use the macro
               PAD_SETSV() rather than calling this function directly.

                       void    pad_setsv(PADOFFSET po, SV *sv)

       pad_sv  Get the value at offset po in the current (compiling or executing) pad.  Use macro PAD_SV instead
               of calling this function directly.

                       SV *    pad_sv(PADOFFSET po)

       pad_tidy
               Tidy up a pad at the end of compilation of the code to which it  belongs.   Jobs  performed  here
               are:  remove  most  stuff  from the pads of anonsub prototypes; give it a @_; mark temporaries as
               such.  type indicates the kind of subroutine:

                   padtidy_SUB        ordinary subroutine
                   padtidy_SUBCLONE   prototype for lexical closure
                   padtidy_FORMAT     format

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    pad_tidy(padtidy_type type)

       perl_alloc
               Allocates a new Perl interpreter.  See perlembed.

                       PerlInterpreter* perl_alloc()

       perl_construct
               Initializes a new Perl interpreter.  See perlembed.

                       void    perl_construct(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)

       perl_destruct
               Shuts down a Perl interpreter.  See perlembed.

                       int     perl_destruct(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)

       perl_free
               Releases a Perl interpreter.  See perlembed.

                       void    perl_free(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)

       perl_parse
               Tells a Perl interpreter to parse a Perl script.  See perlembed.

                       int     perl_parse(PerlInterpreter *my_perl,
                                          XSINIT_t xsinit, int argc,
                                          char** argv, char** env)

       perl_run
               Tells a Perl interpreter to run.  See perlembed.

                       int     perl_run(PerlInterpreter *my_perl)

       require_pv
               Tells Perl to "require" the file named by the string argument.  It is analogous to the Perl  code
               "eval "require '$file'"".  It's even implemented that way; consider using load_module instead.

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       void    require_pv(const char* pv)

Functions in file dump.c

       pv_display
               Similar to

                 pv_escape(dsv,pv,cur,pvlim,PERL_PV_ESCAPE_QUOTE);

               except that an additional "\0" will be appended to the string when len > cur and pv[cur] is "\0".

               Note that the final string may be up to 7 chars longer than pvlim.

                       char*   pv_display(SV *dsv, const char *pv, STRLEN cur,
                                          STRLEN len, STRLEN pvlim)

       pv_escape
               Escapes at most the first "count" chars of pv and puts the results into dsv such that the size of
               the  escaped  string  will  not  exceed  "max"  chars  and will not contain any incomplete escape
               sequences.

               If flags contains PERL_PV_ESCAPE_QUOTE then any double quotes in the string will also be escaped.

               Normally  the  SV  will  be  cleared  before  the  escaped   string   is   prepared,   but   when
               PERL_PV_ESCAPE_NOCLEAR is set this will not occur.

               If   PERL_PV_ESCAPE_UNI   is   set   then   the   input   string   is   treated  as  Unicode,  if
               PERL_PV_ESCAPE_UNI_DETECT is set then the input string is  scanned  using  "is_utf8_string()"  to
               determine if it is Unicode.

               If  PERL_PV_ESCAPE_ALL  is  set then all input chars will be output using "\x01F1" style escapes,
               otherwise if PERL_PV_ESCAPE_NONASCII is set, only chars above 127  will  be  escaped  using  this
               style;  otherwise,  only  chars  above 255 will be so escaped; other non printable chars will use
               octal or common escaped patterns like "\n". Otherwise,  if  PERL_PV_ESCAPE_NOBACKSLASH  then  all
               chars below 255 will be treated as printable and will be output as literals.

               If  PERL_PV_ESCAPE_FIRSTCHAR  is  set  then  only  the  first char of the string will be escaped,
               regardless of max. If the output is to be in hex, then  it  will  be  returned  as  a  plain  hex
               sequence.  Thus  the  output  will  either  be a single char, an octal escape sequence, a special
               escape like "\n" or a hex value.

               If PERL_PV_ESCAPE_RE is set then the escape char used will be a '%'  and  not  a  '\\'.  This  is
               because  regexes  very  often  contain  backslashed  sequences, whereas '%' is not a particularly
               common character in patterns.

               Returns a pointer to the escaped text as held by dsv.

                       char*   pv_escape(SV *dsv, char const * const str,
                                         const STRLEN count, const STRLEN max,
                                         STRLEN * const escaped,
                                         const U32 flags)

       pv_pretty
               Converts a string into something presentable, handling escaping via  pv_escape()  and  supporting
               quoting and ellipses.

               If  the  PERL_PV_PRETTY_QUOTE  flag  is set then the result will be double quoted with any double
               quotes in the string escaped. Otherwise if the PERL_PV_PRETTY_LTGT flag is set then the result be
               wrapped in angle brackets.

               If the PERL_PV_PRETTY_ELLIPSES flag is set and not all characters in string were output  then  an
               ellipsis "..." will be appended to the string. Note that this happens AFTER it has been quoted.

               If start_color is non-null then it will be inserted after the opening quote (if there is one) but
               before the escaped text. If end_color is non-null then it will be inserted after the escaped text
               but before any quotes or ellipses.

               Returns a pointer to the prettified text as held by dsv.

                       char*   pv_pretty(SV *dsv, char const * const str,
                                         const STRLEN count, const STRLEN max,
                                         char const * const start_color,
                                         char const * const end_color,
                                         const U32 flags)

Functions in file mathoms.c

       custom_op_desc
               Return  the  description of a given custom op. This was once used by the OP_DESC macro, but is no
               longer: it has only been kept for compatibility, and should not be used.

                       const char * custom_op_desc(const OP *o)

       custom_op_name
               Return the name for a given custom op. This was once used by the OP_NAME macro, but is no longer:
               it has only been kept for compatibility, and should not be used.

                       const char * custom_op_name(const OP *o)

       gv_fetchmethod
               See "gv_fetchmethod_autoload".

                       GV*     gv_fetchmethod(HV* stash, const char* name)

       pack_cat
               The engine implementing pack() Perl function. Note: parameters next_in_list  and  flags  are  not
               used. This call should not be used; use packlist instead.

                       void    pack_cat(SV *cat, const char *pat,
                                        const char *patend, SV **beglist,
                                        SV **endlist, SV ***next_in_list,
                                        U32 flags)

       sv_2pvbyte_nolen
               Return a pointer to the byte-encoded representation of the SV.  May cause the SV to be downgraded
               from UTF-8 as a side-effect.

               Usually accessed via the "SvPVbyte_nolen" macro.

                       char*   sv_2pvbyte_nolen(SV* sv)

       sv_2pvutf8_nolen
               Return  a pointer to the UTF-8-encoded representation of the SV.  May cause the SV to be upgraded
               to UTF-8 as a side-effect.

               Usually accessed via the "SvPVutf8_nolen" macro.

                       char*   sv_2pvutf8_nolen(SV* sv)

       sv_2pv_nolen
               Like "sv_2pv()", but doesn't return the length too. You should  usually  use  the  macro  wrapper
               "SvPV_nolen(sv)" instead.

                       char*   sv_2pv_nolen(SV* sv)

       sv_catpvn_mg
               Like "sv_catpvn", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_catpvn_mg(SV *sv, const char *ptr,
                                            STRLEN len)

       sv_catsv_mg
               Like "sv_catsv", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_catsv_mg(SV *dsv, SV *ssv)

       sv_force_normal
               Undo  various  types  of  fakery  on an SV: if the PV is a shared string, make a private copy; if
               we're  a  ref,  stop  refing;  if   we're   a   glob,   downgrade   to   an   xpvmg.   See   also
               "sv_force_normal_flags".

                       void    sv_force_normal(SV *sv)

       sv_iv   A  private  implementation of the "SvIVx" macro for compilers which can't cope with complex macro
               expressions. Always use the macro instead.

                       IV      sv_iv(SV* sv)

       sv_nolocking
               Dummy routine which "locks" an SV when there is no locking module present.  Exists to avoid  test
               for  a  NULL  function  pointer and because it could potentially warn under some level of strict-
               ness.

               "Superseded" by sv_nosharing().

                       void    sv_nolocking(SV *sv)

       sv_nounlocking
               Dummy routine which "unlocks" an SV when there is no locking module  present.   Exists  to  avoid
               test  for  a  NULL  function  pointer  and  because it could potentially warn under some level of
               strict-ness.

               "Superseded" by sv_nosharing().

                       void    sv_nounlocking(SV *sv)

       sv_nv   A private implementation of the "SvNVx" macro for compilers which can't cope with  complex  macro
               expressions. Always use the macro instead.

                       NV      sv_nv(SV* sv)

       sv_pv   Use the "SvPV_nolen" macro instead

                       char*   sv_pv(SV *sv)

       sv_pvbyte
               Use "SvPVbyte_nolen" instead.

                       char*   sv_pvbyte(SV *sv)

       sv_pvbyten
               A  private  implementation  of  the  "SvPVbyte" macro for compilers which can't cope with complex
               macro expressions. Always use the macro instead.

                       char*   sv_pvbyten(SV *sv, STRLEN *lp)

       sv_pvn  A private implementation of the "SvPV" macro for compilers which can't cope  with  complex  macro
               expressions. Always use the macro instead.

                       char*   sv_pvn(SV *sv, STRLEN *lp)

       sv_pvutf8
               Use the "SvPVutf8_nolen" macro instead

                       char*   sv_pvutf8(SV *sv)

       sv_pvutf8n
               A  private  implementation  of  the  "SvPVutf8" macro for compilers which can't cope with complex
               macro expressions. Always use the macro instead.

                       char*   sv_pvutf8n(SV *sv, STRLEN *lp)

       sv_taint
               Taint an SV. Use "SvTAINTED_on" instead.

                       void    sv_taint(SV* sv)

       sv_unref
               Unsets the RV status of the SV,  and  decrements  the  reference  count  of  whatever  was  being
               referenced  by  the  RV.   This  can  almost  be  thought of as a reversal of "newSVrv".  This is
               "sv_unref_flags" with the "flag" being zero.  See "SvROK_off".

                       void    sv_unref(SV* sv)

       sv_usepvn
               Tells an SV to use "ptr" to find its string value. Implemented by calling "sv_usepvn_flags"  with
               "flags" of 0, hence does not handle 'set' magic. See "sv_usepvn_flags".

                       void    sv_usepvn(SV* sv, char* ptr, STRLEN len)

       sv_usepvn_mg
               Like "sv_usepvn", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_usepvn_mg(SV *sv, char *ptr, STRLEN len)

       sv_uv   A  private  implementation of the "SvUVx" macro for compilers which can't cope with complex macro
               expressions. Always use the macro instead.

                       UV      sv_uv(SV* sv)

       unpack_str
               The engine implementing unpack() Perl function. Note: parameters strbeg, new_s and ocnt  are  not
               used. This call should not be used, use unpackstring instead.

                       I32     unpack_str(const char *pat, const char *patend,
                                          const char *s, const char *strbeg,
                                          const char *strend, char **new_s,
                                          I32 ocnt, U32 flags)

Functions in file op.c

       alloccopstash
               Available  only  under threaded builds, this function allocates an entry in "PL_stashpad" for the
               stash passed to it.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       PADOFFSET alloccopstash(HV *hv)

       op_contextualize
               Applies a syntactic context to an op tree representing an expression.  o  is  the  op  tree,  and
               context must be "G_SCALAR", "G_ARRAY", or "G_VOID" to specify the context to apply.  The modified
               op tree is returned.

                       OP *    op_contextualize(OP *o, I32 context)

Functions in file perl.h

       PERL_SYS_INIT
               Provides system-specific tune up of the C runtime environment necessary to run Perl interpreters.
               This should be called only once, before creating any Perl interpreters.

                       void    PERL_SYS_INIT(int *argc, char*** argv)

       PERL_SYS_INIT3
               Provides system-specific tune up of the C runtime environment necessary to run Perl interpreters.
               This should be called only once, before creating any Perl interpreters.

                       void    PERL_SYS_INIT3(int *argc, char*** argv,
                                              char*** env)

       PERL_SYS_TERM
               Provides  system-specific  clean up of the C runtime environment after running Perl interpreters.
               This should be called only once, after freeing any remaining Perl interpreters.

                       void    PERL_SYS_TERM()

Functions in file pp_ctl.c

       caller_cx
               The  XSUB-writer's  equivalent  of  caller().  The  returned  "PERL_CONTEXT"  structure  can   be
               interrogated  to find all the information returned to Perl by "caller". Note that XSUBs don't get
               a stack frame, so "caller_cx(0, NULL)" will return information  for  the  immediately-surrounding
               Perl code.

               This  function  skips over the automatic calls to &DB::sub made on the behalf of the debugger. If
               the stack frame requested was a sub called by "DB::sub", the return value will be the  frame  for
               the call to "DB::sub", since that has the correct line number/etc. for the call site. If dbcxp is
               non-"NULL", it will be set to a pointer to the frame for the sub call itself.

                       const PERL_CONTEXT * caller_cx(
                                                I32 level,
                                                const PERL_CONTEXT **dbcxp
                                            )

       find_runcv
               Locate the CV corresponding to the currently executing sub or eval.  If db_seqp is non_null, skip
               CVs  that  are  in the DB package and populate *db_seqp with the cop sequence number at the point
               that the DB:: code was entered. (allows debuggers to eval in the scope of the  breakpoint  rather
               than in the scope of the debugger itself).

                       CV*     find_runcv(U32 *db_seqp)

Functions in file pp_pack.c

       packlist
               The engine implementing pack() Perl function.

                       void    packlist(SV *cat, const char *pat,
                                        const char *patend, SV **beglist,
                                        SV **endlist)

       unpackstring
               The engine implementing the unpack() Perl function.

               Using  the  template  pat..patend,  this  function  unpacks the string s..strend into a number of
               mortal SVs, which it pushes onto the perl argument (@_) stack  (so  you  will  need  to  issue  a
               "PUTBACK"  before and "SPAGAIN" after the call to this function). It returns the number of pushed
               elements.

               The strend and patend pointers should point to the byte following  the  last  character  of  each
               string.

               Although  this  function  returns  its  values  on  the  perl argument stack, it doesn't take any
               parameters from that stack (and thus in particular there's  no  need  to  do  a  PUSHMARK  before
               calling it, unlike "call_pv" for example).

                       I32     unpackstring(const char *pat,
                                            const char *patend, const char *s,
                                            const char *strend, U32 flags)

Functions in file pp_sys.c

       setdefout
               Sets  PL_defoutgv,  the default file handle for output, to the passed in typeglob. As PL_defoutgv
               "owns" a reference on its typeglob, the reference count of the passed in typeglob is increased by
               one, and the reference count of the typeglob that PL_defoutgv points to is decreased by one.

                       void    setdefout(GV* gv)

Functions in file utf8.h

       ibcmp_utf8
               This is a synonym for (! foldEQ_utf8())

                       I32     ibcmp_utf8(const char *s1, char **pe1, UV l1,
                                          bool u1, const char *s2, char **pe2,
                                          UV l2, bool u2)

Functions in file util.h

       ibcmp   This is a synonym for (! foldEQ())

                       I32     ibcmp(const char* a, const char* b, I32 len)

       ibcmp_locale
               This is a synonym for (! foldEQ_locale())

                       I32     ibcmp_locale(const char* a, const char* b,
                                            I32 len)

Global Variables

       PL_check
               Array, indexed by opcode, of functions that will be  called  for  the  "check"  phase  of  optree
               building  during  compilation  of Perl code.  For most (but not all) types of op, once the op has
               been initially built and populated with child ops it will be filtered through the check  function
               referenced  by  the  appropriate  element  of  this  array.   The new op is passed in as the sole
               argument to the check function, and the check function  returns  the  completed  op.   The  check
               function  may  (as  the  name suggests) check the op for validity and signal errors.  It may also
               initialise or modify parts of the ops, or perform more radical surgery such as adding or removing
               child ops, or even throw the op away and return a different op in its place.

               This array of function pointers is a convenient place to hook into the compilation  process.   An
               XS  module  can  put  its  own  custom  check  function  in place of any of the standard ones, to
               influence the compilation of a particular type of op.  However,  a  custom  check  function  must
               never  fully  replace  a  standard  check  function (or even a custom check function from another
               module).  A module modifying checking must instead wrap the preexisting check function.  A custom
               check function must be selective about when to apply its custom behaviour.   In  the  usual  case
               where  it  decides  not  to  do  anything  special  with  an op, it must chain the preexisting op
               function.  Check functions are thus linked in a chain, with the core's base checker at the end.

               For thread safety, modules should not write directly to this array.  Instead,  use  the  function
               "wrap_op_checker".

       PL_keyword_plugin
               Function  pointer,  pointing at a function used to handle extended keywords.  The function should
               be declared as

                       int keyword_plugin_function(pTHX_
                               char *keyword_ptr, STRLEN keyword_len,
                               OP **op_ptr)

               The function is called from the tokeniser, whenever a possible keyword  is  seen.   "keyword_ptr"
               points  at  the  word in the parser's input buffer, and "keyword_len" gives its length; it is not
               null-terminated.  The function is expected to examine the word, and possibly other state such  as
               %^H,  to  decide  whether  it  wants  to  handle  it as an extended keyword.  If it does not, the
               function should return "KEYWORD_PLUGIN_DECLINE", and the normal parser process will continue.

               If the function wants to handle the keyword, it first must parse anything following  the  keyword
               that is part of the syntax introduced by the keyword.  See "Lexer interface" for details.

               When  a  keyword  is  being  handled,  the  plugin function must build a tree of "OP" structures,
               representing the code that was parsed.  The root of the tree must  be  stored  in  *op_ptr.   The
               function  then  returns  a  constant  indicating  the syntactic role of the construct that it has
               parsed: "KEYWORD_PLUGIN_STMT" if it is a complete statement, or "KEYWORD_PLUGIN_EXPR" if it is an
               expression.  Note that a statement construct cannot be used inside an expression (except via  "do
               BLOCK"  and  similar),  and  an  expression  is  not a complete statement (it requires at least a
               terminating semicolon).

               When a keyword is handled, the plugin function may also have (compile-time) side effects.  It may
               modify "%^H", define functions, and so on.  Typically, if side effects are the main purpose of  a
               handler,  it does not wish to generate any ops to be included in the normal compilation.  In this
               case it is still required to supply an op tree, but it suffices to generate a single null op.

               That's how the *PL_keyword_plugin function needs to behave overall.  Conventionally, however, one
               does  not  completely  replace  the  existing  handler  function.   Instead,  take  a   copy   of
               "PL_keyword_plugin"  before  assigning  your  own  function pointer to it.  Your handler function
               should look for keywords that it is interested in and handle those.  Where it is not  interested,
               it  should  call  the  saved  plugin  function,  passing  on  the  arguments  it  received.  Thus
               "PL_keyword_plugin" actually points at a chain  of  handler  functions,  all  of  which  have  an
               opportunity  to  handle  keywords,  and  only the last function in the chain (built into the Perl
               core) will normally return "KEYWORD_PLUGIN_DECLINE".

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

GV Functions

       GvAV    Return the AV from the GV.

                       AV*     GvAV(GV* gv)

       GvCV    Return the CV from the GV.

                       CV*     GvCV(GV* gv)

       GvHV    Return the HV from the GV.

                       HV*     GvHV(GV* gv)

       GvSV    Return the SV from the GV.

                       SV*     GvSV(GV* gv)

       gv_const_sv
               If "gv" is a typeglob whose subroutine entry is a constant sub eligible for inlining, or "gv"  is
               a  placeholder  reference  that  would  be  promoted  to  such a typeglob, then returns the value
               returned by the sub.  Otherwise, returns NULL.

                       SV*     gv_const_sv(GV* gv)

       gv_fetchmeth
               Like "gv_fetchmeth_pvn", but lacks a flags parameter.

                       GV*     gv_fetchmeth(HV* stash, const char* name,
                                            STRLEN len, I32 level)

       gv_fetchmethod_autoload
               Returns the glob which contains the subroutine to call to invoke the method on the  "stash".   In
               fact  in  the  presence  of  autoloading  this  may be the glob for "AUTOLOAD".  In this case the
               corresponding variable $AUTOLOAD is already setup.

               The third parameter of "gv_fetchmethod_autoload" determines whether AUTOLOAD lookup is  performed
               if  the  given method is not present: non-zero means yes, look for AUTOLOAD; zero means no, don't
               look for AUTOLOAD.  Calling "gv_fetchmethod" is equivalent to  calling  "gv_fetchmethod_autoload"
               with a non-zero "autoload" parameter.

               These functions grant "SUPER" token as a prefix of the method name. Note that if you want to keep
               the  returned glob for a long time, you need to check for it being "AUTOLOAD", since at the later
               time the call may load a different subroutine due to $AUTOLOAD changing its value. Use  the  glob
               created via a side effect to do this.

               These  functions have the same side-effects and as "gv_fetchmeth" with "level==0".  "name" should
               be writable  if  contains  ':'  or  '  ''.  The  warning  against  passing  the  GV  returned  by
               "gv_fetchmeth" to "call_sv" apply equally to these functions.

                       GV*     gv_fetchmethod_autoload(HV* stash,
                                                       const char* name,
                                                       I32 autoload)

       gv_fetchmeth_autoload
               This is the old form of "gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload", which has no flags parameter.

                       GV*     gv_fetchmeth_autoload(HV* stash,
                                                     const char* name,
                                                     STRLEN len, I32 level)

       gv_fetchmeth_pv
               Exactly  like  "gv_fetchmeth_pvn",  but  takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length
               pair.

                       GV*     gv_fetchmeth_pv(HV* stash, const char* name,
                                               I32 level, U32 flags)

       gv_fetchmeth_pvn
               Returns the glob with the given "name" and a defined subroutine or "NULL".  The glob lives in the
               given "stash", or in the stashes accessible via @ISA and UNIVERSAL::.

               The argument "level" should be either 0 or -1.  If "level==0", as a side-effect  creates  a  glob
               with the given "name" in the given "stash" which in the case of success contains an alias for the
               subroutine, and sets up caching info for this glob.

               The only significant values for "flags" are GV_SUPER and SVf_UTF8.

               GV_SUPER indicates that we want to look up the method in the superclasses of the "stash".

               The  GV  returned  from  "gv_fetchmeth" may be a method cache entry, which is not visible to Perl
               code.  So when calling "call_sv", you should not use the GV directly; instead, you should use the
               method's CV, which can be obtained from the GV with the "GvCV" macro.

                       GV*     gv_fetchmeth_pvn(HV* stash, const char* name,
                                                STRLEN len, I32 level,
                                                U32 flags)

       gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload
               Same as gv_fetchmeth_pvn(), but looks for autoloaded subroutines too.  Returns  a  glob  for  the
               subroutine.

               For  an  autoloaded  subroutine  without  a  GV,  will  create  a GV even if "level < 0".  For an
               autoloaded subroutine without a stub, GvCV() of the result may be zero.

               Currently, the only significant value for "flags" is SVf_UTF8.

                       GV*     gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload(HV* stash,
                                                         const char* name,
                                                         STRLEN len, I32 level,
                                                         U32 flags)

       gv_fetchmeth_pv_autoload
               Exactly like  "gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload",  but  takes  a  nul-terminated  string  instead  of  a
               string/length pair.

                       GV*     gv_fetchmeth_pv_autoload(HV* stash,
                                                        const char* name,
                                                        I32 level, U32 flags)

       gv_fetchmeth_sv
               Exactly  like  "gv_fetchmeth_pvn",  but  takes  the name string in the form of an SV instead of a
               string/length pair.

                       GV*     gv_fetchmeth_sv(HV* stash, SV* namesv,
                                               I32 level, U32 flags)

       gv_fetchmeth_sv_autoload
               Exactly like "gv_fetchmeth_pvn_autoload", but takes the name string in the form of an SV  instead
               of a string/length pair.

                       GV*     gv_fetchmeth_sv_autoload(HV* stash, SV* namesv,
                                                        I32 level, U32 flags)

       gv_init The old form of gv_init_pvn().  It does not work with UTF8 strings, as it has no flags parameter.
               If the "multi" parameter is set, the GV_ADDMULTI flag will be passed to gv_init_pvn().

                       void    gv_init(GV* gv, HV* stash, const char* name,
                                       STRLEN len, int multi)

       gv_init_pv
               Same  as gv_init_pvn(), but takes a nul-terminated string for the name instead of separate char *
               and length parameters.

                       void    gv_init_pv(GV* gv, HV* stash, const char* name,
                                          U32 flags)

       gv_init_pvn
               Converts a scalar into a typeglob.  This is an incoercible typeglob; assigning a reference to  it
               will  assign  to one of its slots, instead of overwriting it as happens with typeglobs created by
               SvSetSV.  Converting any scalar that is SvOK() may produce unpredictable results and is  reserved
               for perl's internal use.

               "gv" is the scalar to be converted.

               "stash" is the parent stash/package, if any.

               "name"  and  "len" give the name.  The name must be unqualified; that is, it must not include the
               package name.  If "gv" is a stash element, it is the caller's responsibility to ensure  that  the
               name  passed  to  this  function  matches  the name of the element.  If it does not match, perl's
               internal bookkeeping will get out of sync.

               "flags" can be set to SVf_UTF8 if "name" is a UTF8 string, or the return value of SvUTF8(sv).  It
               can also take the GV_ADDMULTI flag, which means to pretend that  the  GV  has  been  seen  before
               (i.e., suppress "Used once" warnings).

                       void    gv_init_pvn(GV* gv, HV* stash, const char* name,
                                           STRLEN len, U32 flags)

       gv_init_sv
               Same  as  gv_init_pvn(),  but  takes  an  SV * for the name instead of separate char * and length
               parameters.  "flags" is currently unused.

                       void    gv_init_sv(GV* gv, HV* stash, SV* namesv,
                                          U32 flags)

       gv_stashpv
               Returns a pointer to the stash for a specified package.  Uses "strlen" to determine the length of
               "name", then calls "gv_stashpvn()".

                       HV*     gv_stashpv(const char* name, I32 flags)

       gv_stashpvn
               Returns a pointer to the stash for a specified package.  The "namelen"  parameter  indicates  the
               length  of  the  "name",  in  bytes.   "flags"  is  passed to "gv_fetchpvn_flags()", so if set to
               "GV_ADD" then the package will be created if it does not already exist.  If the package does  not
               exist  and  "flags"  is  0  (or  any  other  setting  that does not create packages) then NULL is
               returned.

               Flags may be one of:

                   GV_ADD
                   SVf_UTF8
                   GV_NOADD_NOINIT
                   GV_NOINIT
                   GV_NOEXPAND
                   GV_ADDMG

               The most important of which are probably GV_ADD and SVf_UTF8.

                       HV*     gv_stashpvn(const char* name, U32 namelen,
                                           I32 flags)

       gv_stashpvs
               Like "gv_stashpvn", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       HV*     gv_stashpvs(const char* name, I32 create)

       gv_stashsv
               Returns a pointer to the stash for a specified package.  See "gv_stashpvn".

                       HV*     gv_stashsv(SV* sv, I32 flags)

Handy Values

       Nullav  Null AV pointer.

               (deprecated - use "(AV *)NULL" instead)

       Nullch  Null character pointer. (No longer available when "PERL_CORE" is defined.)

       Nullcv  Null CV pointer.

               (deprecated - use "(CV *)NULL" instead)

       Nullhv  Null HV pointer.

               (deprecated - use "(HV *)NULL" instead)

       Nullsv  Null SV pointer. (No longer available when "PERL_CORE" is defined.)

Hash Manipulation Functions

       cop_fetch_label
               Returns the label attached to a cop.  The flags pointer may be set to "SVf_UTF8" or 0.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       const char * cop_fetch_label(COP *const cop,
                                                    STRLEN *len, U32 *flags)

       cop_store_label
               Save a label into a "cop_hints_hash". You need to set flags to "SVf_UTF8" for a utf-8 label.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    cop_store_label(COP *const cop,
                                               const char *label, STRLEN len,
                                               U32 flags)

       get_hv  Returns the HV of the specified Perl hash.  "flags" are passed to "gv_fetchpv".  If  "GV_ADD"  is
               set  and  the  Perl  variable does not exist then it will be created.  If "flags" is zero and the
               variable does not exist then NULL is returned.

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       HV*     get_hv(const char *name, I32 flags)

       HEf_SVKEY
               This flag, used in the length slot of hash entries and magic structures, specifies the  structure
               contains  an  "SV*" pointer where a "char*" pointer is to be expected. (For information only--not
               to be used).

       HeHASH  Returns the computed hash stored in the hash entry.

                       U32     HeHASH(HE* he)

       HeKEY   Returns the actual pointer stored in the key slot of the hash entry. The pointer  may  be  either
               "char*"  or  "SV*",  depending  on the value of "HeKLEN()".  Can be assigned to.  The "HePV()" or
               "HeSVKEY()" macros are usually preferable for finding the value of a key.

                       void*   HeKEY(HE* he)

       HeKLEN  If this is negative, and amounts to "HEf_SVKEY", it indicates  the  entry  holds  an  "SV*"  key.
               Otherwise, holds the actual length of the key.  Can be assigned to. The "HePV()" macro is usually
               preferable for finding key lengths.

                       STRLEN  HeKLEN(HE* he)

       HePV    Returns  the  key slot of the hash entry as a "char*" value, doing any necessary dereferencing of
               possibly "SV*" keys.  The length of the string is placed in "len" (this is a macro, so do not use
               &len).  If you do not care about what the length of the key is, you may use the  global  variable
               "PL_na", though this is rather less efficient than using a local variable.  Remember though, that
               hash  keys  in  perl  are free to contain embedded nulls, so using "strlen()" or similar is not a
               good way to find the length of hash keys. This is very similar to the  "SvPV()"  macro  described
               elsewhere in this document. See also "HeUTF8".

               If  you  are  using  "HePV"  to get values to pass to "newSVpvn()" to create a new SV, you should
               consider using "newSVhek(HeKEY_hek(he))" as it is more efficient.

                       char*   HePV(HE* he, STRLEN len)

       HeSVKEY Returns the key as an "SV*", or "NULL" if the hash entry does not contain an "SV*" key.

                       SV*     HeSVKEY(HE* he)

       HeSVKEY_force
               Returns the key as an "SV*".  Will create and return a temporary mortal "SV*" if the  hash  entry
               contains only a "char*" key.

                       SV*     HeSVKEY_force(HE* he)

       HeSVKEY_set
               Sets  the key to a given "SV*", taking care to set the appropriate flags to indicate the presence
               of an "SV*" key, and returns the same "SV*".

                       SV*     HeSVKEY_set(HE* he, SV* sv)

       HeUTF8  Returns whether the "char *" value returned by "HePV" is encoded in UTF-8,  doing  any  necessary
               dereferencing  of  possibly "SV*" keys.  The value returned will be 0 or non-0, not necessarily 1
               (or even a value with any low bits set), so do not blindly assign this to a "bool"  variable,  as
               "bool" may be a typedef for "char".

                       char*   HeUTF8(HE* he)

       HeVAL   Returns the value slot (type "SV*") stored in the hash entry. Can be assigned to.

                 SV *foo= HeVAL(hv);
                 HeVAL(hv)= sv;

                       SV*     HeVAL(HE* he)

       HvENAME Returns  the effective name of a stash, or NULL if there is none. The effective name represents a
               location in the symbol table where this stash resides. It is updated automatically when  packages
               are  aliased  or  deleted.   A stash that is no longer in the symbol table has no effective name.
               This name is preferable to "HvNAME" for use in MRO linearisations and isa caches.

                       char*   HvENAME(HV* stash)

       HvENAMELEN
               Returns the length of the stash's effective name.

                       STRLEN  HvENAMELEN(HV *stash)

       HvENAMEUTF8
               Returns true if the effective name is in UTF8 encoding.

                       unsigned char HvENAMEUTF8(HV *stash)

       HvNAME  Returns the package name of a stash, or NULL if "stash" isn't a stash.  See "SvSTASH", "CvSTASH".

                       char*   HvNAME(HV* stash)

       HvNAMELEN
               Returns the length of the stash's name.

                       STRLEN  HvNAMELEN(HV *stash)

       HvNAMEUTF8
               Returns true if the name is in UTF8 encoding.

                       unsigned char HvNAMEUTF8(HV *stash)

       hv_assert
               Check that a hash is in an internally consistent state.

                       void    hv_assert(HV *hv)

       hv_clear
               Frees the all the elements of a hash, leaving it empty.  The XS equivalent of "%hash = ()".   See
               also "hv_undef".

               If any destructors are triggered as a result, the hv itself may be freed.

                       void    hv_clear(HV *hv)

       hv_clear_placeholders
               Clears any placeholders from a hash.  If a restricted hash has any of its keys marked as readonly
               and  the  key is subsequently deleted, the key is not actually deleted but is marked by assigning
               it a value of &PL_sv_placeholder.  This tags it so it will be ignored by future  operations  such
               as  iterating  over the hash, but will still allow the hash to have a value reassigned to the key
               at some future point.  This function clears  any  such  placeholder  keys  from  the  hash.   See
               Hash::Util::lock_keys() for an example of its use.

                       void    hv_clear_placeholders(HV *hv)

       hv_copy_hints_hv
               A specialised version of "newHVhv" for copying "%^H".  ohv must be a pointer to a hash (which may
               have "%^H" magic, but should be generally non-magical), or "NULL" (interpreted as an empty hash).
               The  content  of  ohv is copied to a new hash, which has the "%^H"-specific magic added to it.  A
               pointer to the new hash is returned.

                       HV *    hv_copy_hints_hv(HV *ohv)

       hv_delete
               Deletes a key/value pair in the hash.  The value's SV is removed from the hash, made mortal,  and
               returned  to  the  caller.   The absolute value of "klen" is the length of the key.  If "klen" is
               negative the key is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded Unicode.  The "flags" value will  normally  be
               zero;  if  set to G_DISCARD then NULL will be returned.  NULL will also be returned if the key is
               not found.

                       SV*     hv_delete(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen,
                                         I32 flags)

       hv_delete_ent
               Deletes a key/value pair in the hash.  The value SV is removed from the hash,  made  mortal,  and
               returned  to  the caller.  The "flags" value will normally be zero; if set to G_DISCARD then NULL
               will be returned.  NULL will also be returned if the key is not found.  "hash"  can  be  a  valid
               precomputed hash value, or 0 to ask for it to be computed.

                       SV*     hv_delete_ent(HV *hv, SV *keysv, I32 flags,
                                             U32 hash)

       hv_exists
               Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified hash key exists.  The absolute value of "klen"
               is  the  length  of  the  key.   If  "klen" is negative the key is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded
               Unicode.

                       bool    hv_exists(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen)

       hv_exists_ent
               Returns a boolean indicating whether the specified hash  key  exists.   "hash"  can  be  a  valid
               precomputed hash value, or 0 to ask for it to be computed.

                       bool    hv_exists_ent(HV *hv, SV *keysv, U32 hash)

       hv_fetch
               Returns  the SV which corresponds to the specified key in the hash.  The absolute value of "klen"
               is the length of the key.  If "klen" is negative the  key  is  assumed  to  be  in  UTF-8-encoded
               Unicode.   If  "lval" is set then the fetch will be part of a store.  This means that if there is
               no value in the hash associated with the given key, then one is created and a pointer  to  it  is
               returned.   The "SV*" it points to can be assigned to.  But always check that the return value is
               non-null before dereferencing it to an "SV*".

               See "Understanding the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in perlguts for more information  on  how
               to use this function on tied hashes.

                       SV**    hv_fetch(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen,
                                        I32 lval)

       hv_fetchs
               Like "hv_fetch", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       SV**    hv_fetchs(HV* tb, const char* key, I32 lval)

       hv_fetch_ent
               Returns  the  hash  entry  which  corresponds to the specified key in the hash.  "hash" must be a
               valid precomputed hash number for the given "key", or 0 if you want the function to  compute  it.
               IF  "lval" is set then the fetch will be part of a store.  Make sure the return value is non-null
               before accessing it.  The return value when "hv" is  a  tied  hash  is  a  pointer  to  a  static
               location, so be sure to make a copy of the structure if you need to store it somewhere.

               See  "Understanding  the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in perlguts for more information on how
               to use this function on tied hashes.

                       HE*     hv_fetch_ent(HV *hv, SV *keysv, I32 lval,
                                            U32 hash)

       hv_fill Returns the number of hash buckets that happen to be in use. This  function  is  wrapped  by  the
               macro "HvFILL".

               Previously this value was stored in the HV structure, rather than being calculated on demand.

                       STRLEN  hv_fill(HV const *const hv)

       hv_iterinit
               Prepares a starting point to traverse a hash table.  Returns the number of keys in the hash (i.e.
               the  same as "HvUSEDKEYS(hv)").  The return value is currently only meaningful for hashes without
               tie magic.

               NOTE: Before version 5.004_65, "hv_iterinit" used to return  the  number  of  hash  buckets  that
               happen  to  be  in  use.  If you still need that esoteric value, you can get it through the macro
               "HvFILL(hv)".

                       I32     hv_iterinit(HV *hv)

       hv_iterkey
               Returns the key from the current position of the hash iterator.  See "hv_iterinit".

                       char*   hv_iterkey(HE* entry, I32* retlen)

       hv_iterkeysv
               Returns the key as an "SV*" from the current position of the hash  iterator.   The  return  value
               will always be a mortal copy of the key.  Also see "hv_iterinit".

                       SV*     hv_iterkeysv(HE* entry)

       hv_iternext
               Returns entries from a hash iterator.  See "hv_iterinit".

               You  may call "hv_delete" or "hv_delete_ent" on the hash entry that the iterator currently points
               to, without losing your place or invalidating your iterator.  Note that in this case the  current
               entry  is  deleted  from  the  hash  with  your  iterator holding the last reference to it.  Your
               iterator is flagged to free the entry on the next call to "hv_iternext", so you must not  discard
               your  iterator  immediately else the entry will leak - call "hv_iternext" to trigger the resource
               deallocation.

                       HE*     hv_iternext(HV *hv)

       hv_iternextsv
               Performs an "hv_iternext", "hv_iterkey", and "hv_iterval" in one operation.

                       SV*     hv_iternextsv(HV *hv, char **key, I32 *retlen)

       hv_iternext_flags
               Returns entries from a hash iterator.  See "hv_iterinit" and "hv_iternext".   The  "flags"  value
               will  normally  be  zero;  if  HV_ITERNEXT_WANTPLACEHOLDERS  is  set  the  placeholders keys (for
               restricted hashes) will be returned in addition to  normal  keys.  By  default  placeholders  are
               automatically  skipped  over.   Currently  a  placeholder  is  implemented  with  a value that is
               &PL_sv_placeholder.  Note that the implementation  of  placeholders  and  restricted  hashes  may
               change, and the implementation currently is insufficiently abstracted for any change to be tidy.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       HE*     hv_iternext_flags(HV *hv, I32 flags)

       hv_iterval
               Returns the value from the current position of the hash iterator.  See "hv_iterkey".

                       SV*     hv_iterval(HV *hv, HE *entry)

       hv_magic
               Adds magic to a hash.  See "sv_magic".

                       void    hv_magic(HV *hv, GV *gv, int how)

       hv_scalar
               Evaluates the hash in scalar context and returns the result. Handles magic when the hash is tied.

                       SV*     hv_scalar(HV *hv)

       hv_store
               Stores  an  SV in a hash.  The hash key is specified as "key" and the absolute value of "klen" is
               the length of the key.  If "klen" is negative the key is assumed to be in UTF-8-encoded  Unicode.
               The "hash" parameter is the precomputed hash value; if it is zero then Perl will compute it.

               The return value will be NULL if the operation failed or if the value did not need to be actually
               stored  within the hash (as in the case of tied hashes).  Otherwise it can be dereferenced to get
               the original "SV*".  Note that the caller is responsible for suitably incrementing the  reference
               count of "val" before the call, and decrementing it if the function returned NULL.  Effectively a
               successful  hv_store takes ownership of one reference to "val".  This is usually what you want; a
               newly created SV has a reference count of one, so if all your code does is create SVs then  store
               them in a hash, hv_store will own the only reference to the new SV, and your code doesn't need to
               do  anything further to tidy up.  hv_store is not implemented as a call to hv_store_ent, and does
               not create a temporary SV for the key, so if your key data is not already in  SV  form  then  use
               hv_store in preference to hv_store_ent.

               See  "Understanding  the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in perlguts for more information on how
               to use this function on tied hashes.

                       SV**    hv_store(HV *hv, const char *key, I32 klen,
                                        SV *val, U32 hash)

       hv_stores
               Like "hv_store", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair and  omits  the  hash
               parameter.

                       SV**    hv_stores(HV* tb, const char* key,
                                         NULLOK SV* val)

       hv_store_ent
               Stores  "val"  in  a  hash.   The  hash  key  is specified as "key".  The "hash" parameter is the
               precomputed hash value; if it is zero then Perl will compute it.  The return  value  is  the  new
               hash  entry  so created.  It will be NULL if the operation failed or if the value did not need to
               be actually stored within the hash (as in the case of tied hashes).  Otherwise  the  contents  of
               the  return value can be accessed using the "He?" macros described here.  Note that the caller is
               responsible for suitably  incrementing  the  reference  count  of  "val"  before  the  call,  and
               decrementing  it  if  the  function  returned  NULL.  Effectively a successful hv_store_ent takes
               ownership of one reference to "val".  This is usually what you want; a newly  created  SV  has  a
               reference  count  of  one,  so  if  all  your  code does is create SVs then store them in a hash,
               hv_store will own the only reference to the new SV, and your code doesn't  need  to  do  anything
               further  to  tidy up.  Note that hv_store_ent only reads the "key"; unlike "val" it does not take
               ownership of it, so maintaining the correct reference count on "key"  is  entirely  the  caller's
               responsibility.   hv_store  is  not  implemented as a call to hv_store_ent, and does not create a
               temporary SV for the key, so if your key data is not already in SV  form  then  use  hv_store  in
               preference to hv_store_ent.

               See  "Understanding  the Magic of Tied Hashes and Arrays" in perlguts for more information on how
               to use this function on tied hashes.

                       HE*     hv_store_ent(HV *hv, SV *key, SV *val, U32 hash)

       hv_undef
               Undefines the hash.  The XS equivalent of "undef(%hash)".

               As well as freeing all the elements of the hash (like hv_clear()), this also frees any  auxiliary
               data and storage associated with the hash.

               If any destructors are triggered as a result, the hv itself may be freed.

               See also "hv_clear".

                       void    hv_undef(HV *hv)

       newHV   Creates a new HV.  The reference count is set to 1.

                       HV*     newHV()

Hook manipulation

       wrap_op_checker
               Puts  a  C  function  into  the  chain  of  check functions for a specified op type.  This is the
               preferred way to manipulate the "PL_check" array.  opcode specifies which type of  op  is  to  be
               affected.   new_checker is a pointer to the C function that is to be added to that opcode's check
               chain, and old_checker_p points to the storage location where a pointer to the next  function  in
               the  chain  will be stored.  The value of new_pointer is written into the "PL_check" array, while
               the value previously stored there is written to *old_checker_p.

               "PL_check" is global to an entire process, and a module wishing to  hook  op  checking  may  find
               itself  invoked  more  than  once  per  process,  typically in different threads.  To handle that
               situation, this function is idempotent.  The location *old_checker_p  must  initially  (once  per
               process)  contain  a  null  pointer.   A  C  variable of static duration (declared at file scope,
               typically also marked "static" to give  it  internal  linkage)  will  be  implicitly  initialised
               appropriately,  if  it  does  not have an explicit initialiser.  This function will only actually
               modify the check chain if it finds *old_checker_p to be null.  This function is also thread  safe
               on  the  small  scale.   It  uses  appropriate  locking  to  avoid  race  conditions in accessing
               "PL_check".

               When this function is called, the function referenced by new_checker must be ready to be  called,
               except  for  *old_checker_p  being unfilled.  In a threading situation, new_checker may be called
               immediately, even before this function has returned.  *old_checker_p will always be appropriately
               set before new_checker is called.  If new_checker decides not to do anything special with  an  op
               that  it  is given (which is the usual case for most uses of op check hooking), it must chain the
               check function referenced by *old_checker_p.

               If  you  want  to  influence  compilation  of  calls  to  a   specific   subroutine,   then   use
               "cv_set_call_checker" rather than hooking checking of all "entersub" ops.

                       void    wrap_op_checker(Optype opcode,
                                               Perl_check_t new_checker,
                                               Perl_check_t *old_checker_p)

Lexer interface

       lex_bufutf8
               Indicates  whether the octets in the lexer buffer ("PL_parser->linestr") should be interpreted as
               the UTF-8 encoding of Unicode  characters.   If  not,  they  should  be  interpreted  as  Latin-1
               characters.  This is analogous to the "SvUTF8" flag for scalars.

               In  UTF-8 mode, it is not guaranteed that the lexer buffer actually contains valid UTF-8.  Lexing
               code must be robust in the face of invalid encoding.

               The actual "SvUTF8" flag of the "PL_parser->linestr" scalar is significant,  but  not  the  whole
               story  regarding  the  input character encoding.  Normally, when a file is being read, the scalar
               contains octets and its "SvUTF8" flag is off, but the octets should be interpreted  as  UTF-8  if
               the  "use  utf8"  pragma  is  in  effect.  During a string eval, however, the scalar may have the
               "SvUTF8" flag on, and in this case its octets should be interpreted  as  UTF-8  unless  the  "use
               bytes"  pragma  is  in effect.  This logic may change in the future; use this function instead of
               implementing the logic yourself.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       bool    lex_bufutf8()

       lex_discard_to
               Discards the first part of the "PL_parser->linestr" buffer, up to ptr.  The remaining content  of
               the  buffer  will be moved, and all pointers into the buffer updated appropriately.  ptr must not
               be later in the buffer than the position of "PL_parser->bufptr": it is not permitted  to  discard
               text that has yet to be lexed.

               Normally  it  is  not  necessarily  to  do this directly, because it suffices to use the implicit
               discarding behaviour of "lex_next_chunk" and things based on it.  However, if a  token  stretches
               across multiple lines, and the lexing code has kept multiple lines of text in the buffer for that
               purpose,  then  after  completion  of  the  token it would be wise to explicitly discard the now-
               unneeded earlier lines, to avoid future multi-line tokens growing the buffer without bound.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    lex_discard_to(char *ptr)

       lex_grow_linestr
               Reallocates the lexer buffer ("PL_parser->linestr") to accommodate at least len octets (including
               terminating NUL).  Returns a pointer to the reallocated buffer.  This is necessary before  making
               any direct modification of the buffer that would increase its length.  "lex_stuff_pvn" provides a
               more convenient way to insert text into the buffer.

               Do  not  use "SvGROW" or "sv_grow" directly on "PL_parser->linestr"; this function updates all of
               the lexer's variables that point directly into the buffer.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       char *  lex_grow_linestr(STRLEN len)

       lex_next_chunk
               Reads in the next chunk of text to be lexed, appending it to "PL_parser->linestr".   This  should
               be called when lexing code has looked to the end of the current chunk and wants to know more.  It
               is  usual,  but  not  necessary, for lexing to have consumed the entirety of the current chunk at
               this time.

               If "PL_parser->bufptr" is pointing to the very end of the current chunk (i.e., the current  chunk
               has  been  entirely consumed), normally the current chunk will be discarded at the same time that
               the new chunk is read in.  If flags includes "LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS", the current chunk will  not  be
               discarded.   If  the  current chunk has not been entirely consumed, then it will not be discarded
               regardless of the flag.

               Returns true if some new text was added to the buffer, or false if the buffer has reached the end
               of the input text.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       bool    lex_next_chunk(U32 flags)

       lex_peek_unichar
               Looks ahead one (Unicode) character in the text currently being  lexed.   Returns  the  codepoint
               (unsigned  integer value) of the next character, or -1 if lexing has reached the end of the input
               text.  To consume the peeked character, use "lex_read_unichar".

               If the next character is in (or extends into) the next chunk of input text, the next  chunk  will
               be read in.  Normally the current chunk will be discarded at the same time, but if flags includes
               "LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS" then the current chunk will not be discarded.

               If  the  input  is  being  interpreted  as  UTF-8  and  a UTF-8 encoding error is encountered, an
               exception is generated.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       I32     lex_peek_unichar(U32 flags)

       lex_read_space
               Reads optional spaces, in Perl style, in the text currently being lexed.  The spaces may  include
               ordinary  whitespace  characters  and  Perl-style  comments.  "#line" directives are processed if
               encountered.  "PL_parser->bufptr" is moved past the spaces, so that  it  points  at  a  non-space
               character (or the end of the input text).

               If spaces extend into the next chunk of input text, the next chunk will be read in.  Normally the
               current  chunk will be discarded at the same time, but if flags includes "LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS" then
               the current chunk will not be discarded.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    lex_read_space(U32 flags)

       lex_read_to
               Consume  text  in  the  lexer  buffer,  from  "PL_parser->bufptr"  up  to  ptr.   This   advances
               "PL_parser->bufptr" to match ptr, performing the correct bookkeeping whenever a newline character
               is passed.  This is the normal way to consume lexed text.

               Interpretation  of  the  buffer's octets can be abstracted out by using the slightly higher-level
               functions "lex_peek_unichar" and "lex_read_unichar".

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    lex_read_to(char *ptr)

       lex_read_unichar
               Reads the next (Unicode) character in the text currently  being  lexed.   Returns  the  codepoint
               (unsigned integer value) of the character read, and moves "PL_parser->bufptr" past the character,
               or  returns -1 if lexing has reached the end of the input text.  To non-destructively examine the
               next character, use "lex_peek_unichar" instead.

               If the next character is in (or extends into) the next chunk of input text, the next  chunk  will
               be read in.  Normally the current chunk will be discarded at the same time, but if flags includes
               "LEX_KEEP_PREVIOUS" then the current chunk will not be discarded.

               If  the  input  is  being  interpreted  as  UTF-8  and  a UTF-8 encoding error is encountered, an
               exception is generated.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       I32     lex_read_unichar(U32 flags)

       lex_start
               Creates and initialises a new lexer/parser state object, supplying a context in which to lex  and
               parse  from  a  new  source  of  Perl  code.   A  pointer  to  the  new state object is placed in
               "PL_parser".  An entry is made on the save stack so that upon unwinding the new state object will
               be destroyed and the former value of "PL_parser" will be restored.  Nothing else need be done  to
               clean up the parsing context.

               The  code  to  be  parsed  comes from line and rsfp.  line, if non-null, provides a string (in SV
               form) containing code to be parsed.  A copy of the string is made, so subsequent modification  of
               line  does  not affect parsing.  rsfp, if non-null, provides an input stream from which code will
               be read to be parsed.  If both are non-null, the code in line comes first  and  must  consist  of
               complete lines of input, and rsfp supplies the remainder of the source.

               The flags parameter is reserved for future use.  Currently it is only used by perl internally, so
               extensions should always pass zero.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    lex_start(SV *line, PerlIO *rsfp, U32 flags)

       lex_stuff_pv
               Insert  characters  into  the  lexer buffer ("PL_parser->linestr"), immediately after the current
               lexing point ("PL_parser->bufptr"), reallocating the buffer if necessary.  This means that lexing
               code that runs later will see the characters as if they had appeared in the  input.   It  is  not
               recommended  to do this as part of normal parsing, and most uses of this facility run the risk of
               the inserted characters being interpreted in an unintended manner.

               The string to be inserted is represented by octets starting at pv and  continuing  to  the  first
               nul.   These  octets  are  interpreted  as  either  UTF-8  or  Latin-1,  according to whether the
               "LEX_STUFF_UTF8" flag is set in  flags.   The  characters  are  recoded  for  the  lexer  buffer,
               according  to  how  the  buffer  is  currently  being  interpreted ("lex_bufutf8").  If it is not
               convenient to nul-terminate a string  to  be  inserted,  the  "lex_stuff_pvn"  function  is  more
               appropriate.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    lex_stuff_pv(const char *pv, U32 flags)

       lex_stuff_pvn
               Insert  characters  into  the  lexer buffer ("PL_parser->linestr"), immediately after the current
               lexing point ("PL_parser->bufptr"), reallocating the buffer if necessary.  This means that lexing
               code that runs later will see the characters as if they had appeared in the  input.   It  is  not
               recommended  to do this as part of normal parsing, and most uses of this facility run the risk of
               the inserted characters being interpreted in an unintended manner.

               The string to be inserted is represented  by  len  octets  starting  at  pv.   These  octets  are
               interpreted  as either UTF-8 or Latin-1, according to whether the "LEX_STUFF_UTF8" flag is set in
               flags.  The characters are recoded for the lexer buffer, according to how the buffer is currently
               being interpreted ("lex_bufutf8").  If a string to be inserted is available as a Perl scalar, the
               "lex_stuff_sv" function is more convenient.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    lex_stuff_pvn(const char *pv, STRLEN len,
                                             U32 flags)

       lex_stuff_pvs
               Like "lex_stuff_pvn", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    lex_stuff_pvs(const char *pv, U32 flags)

       lex_stuff_sv
               Insert characters into the lexer buffer ("PL_parser->linestr"),  immediately  after  the  current
               lexing point ("PL_parser->bufptr"), reallocating the buffer if necessary.  This means that lexing
               code  that  runs  later  will see the characters as if they had appeared in the input.  It is not
               recommended to do this as part of normal parsing, and most uses of this facility run the risk  of
               the inserted characters being interpreted in an unintended manner.

               The  string  to  be inserted is the string value of sv.  The characters are recoded for the lexer
               buffer, according to how the buffer is currently being interpreted ("lex_bufutf8").  If a  string
               to  be  inserted  is  not  already a Perl scalar, the "lex_stuff_pvn" function avoids the need to
               construct a scalar.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    lex_stuff_sv(SV *sv, U32 flags)

       lex_unstuff
               Discards text about to be lexed, from "PL_parser->bufptr" up to ptr.  Text following ptr will  be
               moved,  and  the  buffer shortened.  This hides the discarded text from any lexing code that runs
               later, as if the text had never appeared.

               This is not the normal way to consume lexed text.  For that, use "lex_read_to".

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       void    lex_unstuff(char *ptr)

       parse_arithexpr
               Parse a Perl arithmetic expression.  This may contain operators of precedence  down  to  the  bit
               shift operators.  The expression must be followed (and thus terminated) either by a comparison or
               lower-precedence  operator  or  by  something that would normally terminate an expression such as
               semicolon.  If flags includes "PARSE_OPTIONAL" then the expression is optional, otherwise  it  is
               mandatory.  It is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is
               correctly  set  to  reflect  the  source of the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the
               expression.

               The op tree representing the expression is returned.  If an optional expression is absent, a null
               pointer is returned, otherwise the pointer will be non-null.

               If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree is  returned  anyway.
               The  error  is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top
               level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred.  Some compilation errors,
               however, will throw an exception immediately.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       OP *    parse_arithexpr(U32 flags)

       parse_barestmt
               Parse a single unadorned Perl statement.   This  may  be  a  normal  imperative  statement  or  a
               declaration  that has compile-time effect.  It does not include any label or other affixture.  It
               is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is correctly  set
               to reflect the source of the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the statement.

               The  op tree representing the statement is returned.  This may be a null pointer if the statement
               is null, for example if it was actually a subroutine  definition  (which  has  compile-time  side
               effects).   If  not null, it will be ops directly implementing the statement, suitable to pass to
               "newSTATEOP".  It will not normally include a "nextstate" or  equivalent  op  (except  for  those
               embedded in a scope contained entirely within the statement).

               If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree (most likely null) is
               returned  anyway.   The  error  is  reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single
               exception at the top level of parsing which covers all  the  compilation  errors  that  occurred.
               Some compilation errors, however, will throw an exception immediately.

               The flags parameter is reserved for future use, and must always be zero.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       OP *    parse_barestmt(U32 flags)

       parse_block
               Parse  a  single  complete  Perl  code  block.   This consists of an opening brace, a sequence of
               statements, and a closing brace.  The block constitutes a lexical scope, so  "my"  variables  and
               various  compile-time  effects can be contained within it.  It is up to the caller to ensure that
               the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is correctly set to reflect the source of  the  code
               to be parsed and the lexical context for the statement.

               The  op  tree  representing  the  code block is returned.  This is always a real op, never a null
               pointer.  It will normally be a "lineseq" list, including "nextstate" or equivalent ops.  No  ops
               to construct any kind of runtime scope are included by virtue of it being a block.

               If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree (most likely null) is
               returned  anyway.   The  error  is  reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single
               exception at the top level of parsing which covers all  the  compilation  errors  that  occurred.
               Some compilation errors, however, will throw an exception immediately.

               The flags parameter is reserved for future use, and must always be zero.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       OP *    parse_block(U32 flags)

       parse_fullexpr
               Parse  a single complete Perl expression.  This allows the full expression grammar, including the
               lowest-precedence operators such as "or".  The expression must be followed (and thus  terminated)
               by  a  token  that an expression would normally be terminated by: end-of-file, closing bracketing
               punctuation, semicolon, or one of  the  keywords  that  signals  a  postfix  expression-statement
               modifier.   If  flags  includes "PARSE_OPTIONAL" then the expression is optional, otherwise it is
               mandatory.  It is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is
               correctly set to reflect the source of the code to be parsed and  the  lexical  context  for  the
               expression.

               The op tree representing the expression is returned.  If an optional expression is absent, a null
               pointer is returned, otherwise the pointer will be non-null.

               If  an  error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree is returned anyway.
               The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at  the  top
               level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred.  Some compilation errors,
               however, will throw an exception immediately.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       OP *    parse_fullexpr(U32 flags)

       parse_fullstmt
               Parse  a  single  complete  Perl  statement.   This  may  be  a  normal imperative statement or a
               declaration that has compile-time effect, and may include optional  labels.   It  is  up  to  the
               caller  to  ensure  that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is correctly set to reflect
               the source of the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the statement.

               The op tree representing the statement is returned.  This may be a null pointer if the  statement
               is  null,  for  example  if  it was actually a subroutine definition (which has compile-time side
               effects).  If not null, it will be the result  of  a  "newSTATEOP"  call,  normally  including  a
               "nextstate" or equivalent op.

               If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree (most likely null) is
               returned  anyway.   The  error  is  reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single
               exception at the top level of parsing which covers all  the  compilation  errors  that  occurred.
               Some compilation errors, however, will throw an exception immediately.

               The flags parameter is reserved for future use, and must always be zero.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       OP *    parse_fullstmt(U32 flags)

       parse_label
               Parse  a single label, possibly optional, of the type that may prefix a Perl statement.  It is up
               to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al)  is  correctly  set  to
               reflect  the  source of the code to be parsed.  If flags includes "PARSE_OPTIONAL" then the label
               is optional, otherwise it is mandatory.

               The name of the label is returned in the form of a fresh scalar.  If an optional label is absent,
               a null pointer is returned.

               If an error occurs in parsing, which can only occur if the label is mandatory, a valid  label  is
               returned  anyway.   The  error  is  reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single
               exception at the top level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SV *    parse_label(U32 flags)

       parse_listexpr
               Parse a Perl list expression.  This may  contain  operators  of  precedence  down  to  the  comma
               operator.  The expression must be followed (and thus terminated) either by a low-precedence logic
               operator  such  as  "or"  or  by  something  that  would normally terminate an expression such as
               semicolon.  If flags includes "PARSE_OPTIONAL" then the expression is optional, otherwise  it  is
               mandatory.  It is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is
               correctly  set  to  reflect  the  source of the code to be parsed and the lexical context for the
               expression.

               The op tree representing the expression is returned.  If an optional expression is absent, a null
               pointer is returned, otherwise the pointer will be non-null.

               If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree is  returned  anyway.
               The  error  is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top
               level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred.  Some compilation errors,
               however, will throw an exception immediately.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       OP *    parse_listexpr(U32 flags)

       parse_stmtseq
               Parse a sequence of zero or more Perl statements.  These may  be  normal  imperative  statements,
               including optional labels, or declarations that have compile-time effect, or any mixture thereof.
               The statement sequence ends when a closing brace or end-of-file is encountered in a place where a
               new  statement  could  have  validly  started.  It is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic
               parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is correctly set to reflect the source of the code to be  parsed
               and the lexical context for the statements.

               The  op  tree representing the statement sequence is returned.  This may be a null pointer if the
               statements were all null, for example  if  there  were  no  statements  or  if  there  were  only
               subroutine  definitions  (which  have  compile-time  side  effects).   If  not null, it will be a
               "lineseq" list, normally including "nextstate" or equivalent ops.

               If an error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree is  returned  anyway.
               The  error  is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at the top
               level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred.  Some compilation errors,
               however, will throw an exception immediately.

               The flags parameter is reserved for future use, and must always be zero.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       OP *    parse_stmtseq(U32 flags)

       parse_termexpr
               Parse a Perl term expression.  This may contain operators of precedence down  to  the  assignment
               operators.   The  expression  must  be followed (and thus terminated) either by a comma or lower-
               precedence operator or  by  something  that  would  normally  terminate  an  expression  such  as
               semicolon.   If  flags includes "PARSE_OPTIONAL" then the expression is optional, otherwise it is
               mandatory.  It is up to the caller to ensure that the dynamic parser state ("PL_parser" et al) is
               correctly set to reflect the source of the code to be parsed and  the  lexical  context  for  the
               expression.

               The op tree representing the expression is returned.  If an optional expression is absent, a null
               pointer is returned, otherwise the pointer will be non-null.

               If  an  error occurs in parsing or compilation, in most cases a valid op tree is returned anyway.
               The error is reflected in the parser state, normally resulting in a single exception at  the  top
               level of parsing which covers all the compilation errors that occurred.  Some compilation errors,
               however, will throw an exception immediately.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       OP *    parse_termexpr(U32 flags)

       PL_parser
               Pointer  to  a  structure encapsulating the state of the parsing operation currently in progress.
               The pointer can be locally changed to perform a nested parse without interfering with  the  state
               of an outer parse.  Individual members of "PL_parser" have their own documentation.

       PL_parser->bufend
               Direct  pointer  to  the  end  of  the  chunk of text currently being lexed, the end of the lexer
               buffer.  This  is  equal  to  "SvPVX(PL_parser->linestr)  +  SvCUR(PL_parser->linestr)".   A  NUL
               character  (zero octet) is always located at the end of the buffer, and does not count as part of
               the buffer's contents.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

       PL_parser->bufptr
               Points to the current position of lexing inside the lexer buffer.  Characters around  this  point
               may  be  freely  examined,  within  the  range  delimited  by  "SvPVX("PL_parser->linestr")"  and
               "PL_parser->bufend".  The octets of the buffer may be intended to be interpreted as either  UTF-8
               or Latin-1, as indicated by "lex_bufutf8".

               Lexing  code  (whether  in  the  Perl core or not) moves this pointer past the characters that it
               consumes.  It is also expected to perform  some  bookkeeping  whenever  a  newline  character  is
               consumed.   This movement can be more conveniently performed by the function "lex_read_to", which
               handles newlines appropriately.

               Interpretation of the buffer's octets can be abstracted out by using  the  slightly  higher-level
               functions "lex_peek_unichar" and "lex_read_unichar".

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

       PL_parser->linestart
               Points  to  the start of the current line inside the lexer buffer.  This is useful for indicating
               at which column an error occurred, and not much else.  This must be updated by  any  lexing  code
               that consumes a newline; the function "lex_read_to" handles this detail.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

       PL_parser->linestr
               Buffer  scalar  containing  the  chunk  currently under consideration of the text currently being
               lexed.  This is always a plain string scalar (for which "SvPOK" is true).  It is not intended  to
               be  used  as a scalar by normal scalar means; instead refer to the buffer directly by the pointer
               variables described below.

               The lexer maintains various "char*" pointers to things in the  "PL_parser->linestr"  buffer.   If
               "PL_parser->linestr"  is  ever reallocated, all of these pointers must be updated.  Don't attempt
               to do this manually, but rather use "lex_grow_linestr" if you need to reallocate the buffer.

               The content of the text chunk in the buffer is commonly exactly one complete line of input, up to
               and including a newline terminator, but there are situations where it is otherwise.   The  octets
               of  the  buffer  may  be  intended  to  be  interpreted as either UTF-8 or Latin-1.  The function
               "lex_bufutf8" tells you which.  Do not use the "SvUTF8" flag on this scalar, which  may  disagree
               with it.

               For  direct  examination of the buffer, the variable "PL_parser->bufend" points to the end of the
               buffer.  The current lexing position is pointed to by "PL_parser->bufptr".  Direct use  of  these
               pointers is usually preferable to examination of the scalar through normal scalar means.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

Magical Functions

       mg_clear
               Clear something magical that the SV represents.  See "sv_magic".

                       int     mg_clear(SV* sv)

       mg_copy Copies the magic from one SV to another.  See "sv_magic".

                       int     mg_copy(SV *sv, SV *nsv, const char *key,
                                       I32 klen)

       mg_find Finds the magic pointer for type matching the SV.  See "sv_magic".

                       MAGIC*  mg_find(const SV* sv, int type)

       mg_findext
               Finds the magic pointer of "type" with the given "vtbl" for the "SV".  See "sv_magicext".

                       MAGIC*  mg_findext(const SV* sv, int type,
                                          const MGVTBL *vtbl)

       mg_free Free any magic storage used by the SV.  See "sv_magic".

                       int     mg_free(SV* sv)

       mg_free_type
               Remove any magic of type how from the SV sv.  See "sv_magic".

                       void    mg_free_type(SV *sv, int how)

       mg_get  Do  magic  before  a  value  is  retrieved  from the SV.  The type of SV must be >= SVt_PVMG. See
               "sv_magic".

                       int     mg_get(SV* sv)

       mg_length
               This function is deprecated.

               It reports on the SV's length in bytes, calling length magic if available, but does not  set  the
               UTF8 flag on the sv.  It will fall back to 'get' magic if there is no 'length' magic, but with no
               indication  as  to  whether  it  called 'get' magic.  It assumes the sv is a PVMG or higher.  Use
               sv_len() instead.

                       U32     mg_length(SV* sv)

       mg_magical
               Turns on the magical status of an SV.  See "sv_magic".

                       void    mg_magical(SV* sv)

       mg_set  Do magic after a value is assigned to the SV.  See "sv_magic".

                       int     mg_set(SV* sv)

       SvGETMAGIC
               Invokes "mg_get" on an SV if it has 'get' magic.  For example, this will call "FETCH" on  a  tied
               variable.  This macro evaluates its argument more than once.

                       void    SvGETMAGIC(SV* sv)

       SvLOCK  Arranges for a mutual exclusion lock to be obtained on sv if a suitable module has been loaded.

                       void    SvLOCK(SV* sv)

       SvSETMAGIC
               Invokes  "mg_set" on an SV if it has 'set' magic.  This is necessary after modifying a scalar, in
               case it is a magical variable like $|  or  a  tied  variable  (it  calls  "STORE").   This  macro
               evaluates its argument more than once.

                       void    SvSETMAGIC(SV* sv)

       SvSetMagicSV
               Like "SvSetSV", but does any set magic required afterwards.

                       void    SvSetMagicSV(SV* dsb, SV* ssv)

       SvSetMagicSV_nosteal
               Like "SvSetSV_nosteal", but does any set magic required afterwards.

                       void    SvSetMagicSV_nosteal(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)

       SvSetSV Calls "sv_setsv" if dsv is not the same as ssv.  May evaluate arguments more than once.

                       void    SvSetSV(SV* dsb, SV* ssv)

       SvSetSV_nosteal
               Calls  a  non-destructive  version  of  "sv_setsv"  if  dsv is not the same as ssv.  May evaluate
               arguments more than once.

                       void    SvSetSV_nosteal(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)

       SvSHARE Arranges for sv to be shared between threads if a suitable module has been loaded.

                       void    SvSHARE(SV* sv)

       SvUNLOCK
               Releases a mutual exclusion lock on sv if a suitable module has been loaded.

                       void    SvUNLOCK(SV* sv)

Memory Management

       Copy    The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "memcpy" function.  The "src" is the source, "dest"  is  the
               destination,  "nitems"  is  the number of items, and "type" is the type.  May fail on overlapping
               copies.  See also "Move".

                       void    Copy(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)

       CopyD   Like "Copy" but returns dest. Useful for encouraging compilers to tail-call optimise.

                       void *  CopyD(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)

       Move    The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "memmove" function.  The "src" is the source, "dest" is  the
               destination,  "nitems" is the number of items, and "type" is the type.  Can do overlapping moves.
               See also "Copy".

                       void    Move(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)

       MoveD   Like "Move" but returns dest. Useful for encouraging compilers to tail-call optimise.

                       void *  MoveD(void* src, void* dest, int nitems, type)

       Newx    The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "malloc" function.

               In 5.9.3, Newx() and friends replace the older New() API, and drops the  first  parameter,  x,  a
               debug  aid  which  allowed callers to identify themselves.  This aid has been superseded by a new
               build option, PERL_MEM_LOG (see "PERL_MEM_LOG" in perlhacktips).  The older API  is  still  there
               for use in XS modules supporting older perls.

                       void    Newx(void* ptr, int nitems, type)

       Newxc   The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "malloc" function, with cast.  See also "Newx".

                       void    Newxc(void* ptr, int nitems, type, cast)

       Newxz   The  XSUB-writer's  interface  to  the  C "malloc" function.  The allocated memory is zeroed with
               "memzero".  See also "Newx".

                       void    Newxz(void* ptr, int nitems, type)

       Poison  PoisonWith(0xEF) for catching access to freed memory.

                       void    Poison(void* dest, int nitems, type)

       PoisonFree
               PoisonWith(0xEF) for catching access to freed memory.

                       void    PoisonFree(void* dest, int nitems, type)

       PoisonNew
               PoisonWith(0xAB) for catching access to allocated but uninitialized memory.

                       void    PoisonNew(void* dest, int nitems, type)

       PoisonWith
               Fill up memory with a byte pattern (a byte repeated over and over again) that  hopefully  catches
               attempts to access uninitialized memory.

                       void    PoisonWith(void* dest, int nitems, type,
                                          U8 byte)

       Renew   The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "realloc" function.

                       void    Renew(void* ptr, int nitems, type)

       Renewc  The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "realloc" function, with cast.

                       void    Renewc(void* ptr, int nitems, type, cast)

       Safefree
               The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "free" function.

                       void    Safefree(void* ptr)

       savepv  Perl's  version of "strdup()". Returns a pointer to a newly allocated string which is a duplicate
               of "pv". The size of the string is determined by "strlen()". The memory  allocated  for  the  new
               string can be freed with the "Safefree()" function.

                       char*   savepv(const char* pv)

       savepvn Perl's version of what "strndup()" would be if it existed. Returns a pointer to a newly allocated
               string  which  is  a  duplicate of the first "len" bytes from "pv", plus a trailing NUL byte. The
               memory allocated for the new string can be freed with the "Safefree()" function.

                       char*   savepvn(const char* pv, I32 len)

       savepvs Like "savepvn", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       char*   savepvs(const char* s)

       savesharedpv
               A version of "savepv()" which allocates the duplicate string in memory which  is  shared  between
               threads.

                       char*   savesharedpv(const char* pv)

       savesharedpvn
               A  version  of "savepvn()" which allocates the duplicate string in memory which is shared between
               threads. (With the specific difference that a NULL pointer is not acceptable)

                       char*   savesharedpvn(const char *const pv,
                                             const STRLEN len)

       savesharedpvs
               A version of "savepvs()" which allocates the duplicate string in memory which is  shared  between
               threads.

                       char*   savesharedpvs(const char* s)

       savesharedsvpv
               A  version  of  "savesharedpv()"  which  allocates the duplicate string in memory which is shared
               between threads.

                       char*   savesharedsvpv(SV *sv)

       savesvpv
               A version of "savepv()"/"savepvn()" which gets the string to duplicate  from  the  passed  in  SV
               using "SvPV()"

                       char*   savesvpv(SV* sv)

       StructCopy
               This is an architecture-independent macro to copy one structure to another.

                       void    StructCopy(type *src, type *dest, type)

       Zero    The XSUB-writer's interface to the C "memzero" function.  The "dest" is the destination, "nitems"
               is the number of items, and "type" is the type.

                       void    Zero(void* dest, int nitems, type)

       ZeroD   Like "Zero" but returns dest. Useful for encouraging compilers to tail-call optimise.

                       void *  ZeroD(void* dest, int nitems, type)

Miscellaneous Functions

       fbm_compile
               Analyses  the  string  in  order to make fast searches on it using fbm_instr() -- the Boyer-Moore
               algorithm.

                       void    fbm_compile(SV* sv, U32 flags)

       fbm_instr
               Returns the location of the SV in the string delimited by "big" and "bigend".  It returns  "NULL"
               if the string can't be found.  The "sv" does not have to be fbm_compiled, but the search will not
               be as fast then.

                       char*   fbm_instr(unsigned char* big,
                                         unsigned char* bigend, SV* littlestr,
                                         U32 flags)

       foldEQ  Returns  true  if the leading len bytes of the strings s1 and s2 are the same case-insensitively;
               false otherwise.  Uppercase and lowercase ASCII range bytes match themselves and  their  opposite
               case counterparts.  Non-cased and non-ASCII range bytes match only themselves.

                       I32     foldEQ(const char* a, const char* b, I32 len)

       foldEQ_locale
               Returns true if the leading len bytes of the strings s1 and s2 are the same case-insensitively in
               the current locale; false otherwise.

                       I32     foldEQ_locale(const char* a, const char* b,
                                             I32 len)

       form    Takes  a  sprintf-style  format  pattern  and  conventional  (non-SV)  arguments  and returns the
               formatted string.

                   (char *) Perl_form(pTHX_ const char* pat, ...)

               can be used any place a string (char *) is required:

                   char * s = Perl_form("%d.%d",major,minor);

               Uses a single private buffer so if you want to format several strings you  must  explicitly  copy
               the earlier strings away (and free the copies when you are done).

                       char*   form(const char* pat, ...)

       getcwd_sv
               Fill the sv with current working directory

                       int     getcwd_sv(SV* sv)

       mess    Take  a  sprintf-style  format  pattern  and  argument list.  These are used to generate a string
               message.  If the message does not end with  a  newline,  then  it  will  be  extended  with  some
               indication of the current location in the code, as described for "mess_sv".

               Normally,  the  resulting  message  is  returned in a new mortal SV.  During global destruction a
               single SV may be shared between uses of this function.

                       SV *    mess(const char *pat, ...)

       mess_sv Expands a message, intended for the user, to include an indication of the current location in the
               code, if the message does not already appear to be complete.

               "basemsg" is the initial message or object.  If it is a reference, it will be used as-is and will
               be the result of this function.  Otherwise it is used as a string, and if it already ends with  a
               newline, it is taken to be complete, and the result of this function will be the same string.  If
               the  message  does  not  end  with  a newline, then a segment such as "at foo.pl line 37" will be
               appended, and possibly other clauses indicating the current state of  execution.   The  resulting
               message will end with a dot and a newline.

               Normally,  the  resulting  message  is  returned in a new mortal SV.  During global destruction a
               single SV may be shared between uses of this function.  If "consume" is true, then  the  function
               is permitted (but not required) to modify and return "basemsg" instead of allocating a new SV.

                       SV *    mess_sv(SV *basemsg, bool consume)

       my_snprintf
               The  C  library "snprintf" functionality, if available and standards-compliant (uses "vsnprintf",
               actually).  However, if the "vsnprintf" is not  available,  will  unfortunately  use  the  unsafe
               "vsprintf"  which  can  overrun the buffer (there is an overrun check, but that may be too late).
               Consider using "sv_vcatpvf" instead, or getting "vsnprintf".

                       int     my_snprintf(char *buffer, const Size_t len,
                                           const char *format, ...)

       my_sprintf
               The C library "sprintf", wrapped if necessary, to ensure that it will return the  length  of  the
               string written to the buffer. Only rare pre-ANSI systems need the wrapper function - usually this
               is a direct call to "sprintf".

                       int     my_sprintf(char *buffer, const char *pat, ...)

       my_vsnprintf
               The  C  library "vsnprintf" if available and standards-compliant.  However, if if the "vsnprintf"
               is not available, will unfortunately use the unsafe  "vsprintf"  which  can  overrun  the  buffer
               (there  is  an overrun check, but that may be too late).  Consider using "sv_vcatpvf" instead, or
               getting "vsnprintf".

                       int     my_vsnprintf(char *buffer, const Size_t len,
                                            const char *format, va_list ap)

       new_version
               Returns a new version object based on the passed in SV:

                   SV *sv = new_version(SV *ver);

               Does not alter the passed in ver SV.  See "upg_version" if you want to upgrade the SV.

                       SV*     new_version(SV *ver)

       prescan_version
               Validate that a given string can be parsed as a version object, but doesn't actually perform  the
               parsing.   Can  use  either  strict or lax validation rules.  Can optionally set a number of hint
               variables to save the parsing code some time when tokenizing.

                       const char* prescan_version(const char *s, bool strict,
                                                   const char** errstr,
                                                   bool *sqv,
                                                   int *ssaw_decimal,
                                                   int *swidth, bool *salpha)

       READ_XDIGIT
               Returns the value of an ASCII-range hex digit and advances the string pointer.  Behaviour is only
               well defined when isXDIGIT(*str) is true.

                       U8      READ_XDIGIT(char str*)

       scan_version
               Returns a pointer to the next character after the parsed version string, as well as upgrading the
               passed in SV to an RV.

               Function must be called with an already existing SV like

                   sv = newSV(0);
                   s = scan_version(s, SV *sv, bool qv);

               Performs some preprocessing to the string to ensure that it has the correct characteristics of  a
               version.  Flags the object if it contains an underscore (which denotes this is an alpha version).
               The  boolean  qv  denotes  that the version should be interpreted as if it had multiple decimals,
               even if it doesn't.

                       const char* scan_version(const char *s, SV *rv, bool qv)

       strEQ   Test two strings to see if they are equal.  Returns true or false.

                       bool    strEQ(char* s1, char* s2)

       strGE   Test two strings to see if the first, "s1", is  greater  than  or  equal  to  the  second,  "s2".
               Returns true or false.

                       bool    strGE(char* s1, char* s2)

       strGT   Test  two  strings  to see if the first, "s1", is greater than the second, "s2".  Returns true or
               false.

                       bool    strGT(char* s1, char* s2)

       strLE   Test two strings to see if the first, "s1", is less than or equal to the second,  "s2".   Returns
               true or false.

                       bool    strLE(char* s1, char* s2)

       strLT   Test  two  strings  to  see  if  the first, "s1", is less than the second, "s2".  Returns true or
               false.

                       bool    strLT(char* s1, char* s2)

       strNE   Test two strings to see if they are different.  Returns true or false.

                       bool    strNE(char* s1, char* s2)

       strnEQ  Test two strings to see if they are equal.  The "len" parameter indicates the number of bytes  to
               compare.  Returns true or false. (A wrapper for "strncmp").

                       bool    strnEQ(char* s1, char* s2, STRLEN len)

       strnNE  Test two strings to see if they are different.  The "len" parameter indicates the number of bytes
               to compare.  Returns true or false. (A wrapper for "strncmp").

                       bool    strnNE(char* s1, char* s2, STRLEN len)

       sv_destroyable
               Dummy routine which reports that object can be destroyed when there is no sharing module present.
               It  ignores its single SV argument, and returns 'true'.  Exists to avoid test for a NULL function
               pointer and because it could potentially warn under some level of strict-ness.

                       bool    sv_destroyable(SV *sv)

       sv_nosharing
               Dummy routine which "shares" an SV when there is no sharing module present.  Or  "locks"  it.  Or
               "unlocks"  it.  In  other words, ignores its single SV argument.  Exists to avoid test for a NULL
               function pointer and because it could potentially warn under some level of strict-ness.

                       void    sv_nosharing(SV *sv)

       upg_version
               In-place upgrade of the supplied SV to a version object.

                   SV *sv = upg_version(SV *sv, bool qv);

               Returns a pointer to the upgraded SV.  Set the boolean qv if you want to  force  this  SV  to  be
               interpreted as an "extended" version.

                       SV*     upg_version(SV *ver, bool qv)

       vcmp    Version object aware cmp.  Both operands must already have been converted into version objects.

                       int     vcmp(SV *lhv, SV *rhv)

       vmess   "pat"  and  "args"  are a sprintf-style format pattern and encapsulated argument list.  These are
               used to generate a string message.  If the message does not end with a newline, then it  will  be
               extended with some indication of the current location in the code, as described for "mess_sv".

               Normally,  the  resulting  message  is  returned in a new mortal SV.  During global destruction a
               single SV may be shared between uses of this function.

                       SV *    vmess(const char *pat, va_list *args)

       vnormal Accepts a version object and returns the normalized string representation.  Call like:

                   sv = vnormal(rv);

               NOTE: you can pass either the object directly or the SV contained within the RV.

               The SV returned has a refcount of 1.

                       SV*     vnormal(SV *vs)

       vnumify Accepts a version object and returns the normalized floating point representation.  Call like:

                   sv = vnumify(rv);

               NOTE: you can pass either the object directly or the SV contained within the RV.

               The SV returned has a refcount of 1.

                       SV*     vnumify(SV *vs)

       vstringify
               In order to maintain maximum compatibility with earlier versions  of  Perl,  this  function  will
               return  either  the floating point notation or the multiple dotted notation, depending on whether
               the original version contained 1 or more dots, respectively.

               The SV returned has a refcount of 1.

                       SV*     vstringify(SV *vs)

       vverify Validates that the SV contains valid internal structure for a version object.  It may  be  passed
               either  the  version  object (RV) or the hash itself (HV).  If the structure is valid, it returns
               the HV.  If the structure is invalid, it returns NULL.

                   SV *hv = vverify(sv);

               Note that it only confirms the bare minimum structure (so as  not  to  get  confused  by  derived
               classes which may contain additional hash entries):

                       SV*     vverify(SV *vs)

MRO Functions

       mro_get_linear_isa
               Returns  the  mro  linearisation  for  the  given  stash.   By  default,  this  will  be whatever
               "mro_get_linear_isa_dfs" returns unless some other MRO is in effect for the  stash.   The  return
               value is a read-only AV*.

               You  are  responsible  for  "SvREFCNT_inc()" on the return value if you plan to store it anywhere
               semi-permanently (otherwise it might be deleted out from under you the next  time  the  cache  is
               invalidated).

                       AV*     mro_get_linear_isa(HV* stash)

       mro_method_changed_in
               Invalidates method caching on any child classes of the given stash, so that they might notice the
               changes in this one.

               Ideally,  all  instances  of  "PL_sub_generation++"  in  perl  source  outside of mro.c should be
               replaced by calls to this.

               Perl automatically handles most of the common ways a method might be redefined.   However,  there
               are  a  few  ways  you could change a method in a stash without the cache code noticing, in which
               case you need to call this method afterwards:

               1) Directly manipulating the stash HV entries from XS code.

               2) Assigning a reference to a readonly scalar constant into a stash entry in order  to  create  a
               constant subroutine (like constant.pm does).

               This same method is available from pure perl via, "mro::method_changed_in(classname)".

                       void    mro_method_changed_in(HV* stash)

       mro_register
               Registers a custom mro plugin.  See perlmroapi for details.

                       void    mro_register(const struct mro_alg *mro)

Multicall Functions

       dMULTICALL
               Declare local variables for a multicall. See "LIGHTWEIGHT CALLBACKS" in perlcall.

                               dMULTICALL;

       MULTICALL
               Make a lightweight callback. See "LIGHTWEIGHT CALLBACKS" in perlcall.

                               MULTICALL;

       POP_MULTICALL
               Closing bracket for a lightweight callback.  See "LIGHTWEIGHT CALLBACKS" in perlcall.

                               POP_MULTICALL;

       PUSH_MULTICALL
               Opening bracket for a lightweight callback.  See "LIGHTWEIGHT CALLBACKS" in perlcall.

                               PUSH_MULTICALL;

Numeric functions

       grok_bin
               converts a string representing a binary number to numeric form.

               On entry start and *len give the string to scan, *flags gives conversion flags, and result should
               be  NULL  or  a  pointer to an NV.  The scan stops at the end of the string, or the first invalid
               character.   Unless  "PERL_SCAN_SILENT_ILLDIGIT"  is  set  in  *flags,  encountering  an  invalid
               character  will  also  trigger  a  warning.   On  return *len is set to the length of the scanned
               string, and *flags gives output flags.

               If the value is <= "UV_MAX" it is returned as a UV, the output flags are clear,  and  nothing  is
               written   to   *result.   If   the   value   is   >   UV_MAX   "grok_bin"  returns  UV_MAX,  sets
               "PERL_SCAN_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX" in the output flags, and writes the  value  to  *result  (or  the
               value is discarded if result is NULL).

               The  binary number may optionally be prefixed with "0b" or "b" unless "PERL_SCAN_DISALLOW_PREFIX"
               is set in *flags on entry. If "PERL_SCAN_ALLOW_UNDERSCORES" is set  in  *flags  then  the  binary
               number may use '_' characters to separate digits.

                       UV      grok_bin(const char* start, STRLEN* len_p,
                                        I32* flags, NV *result)

       grok_hex
               converts a string representing a hex number to numeric form.

               On entry start and *len give the string to scan, *flags gives conversion flags, and result should
               be  NULL  or  a  pointer to an NV.  The scan stops at the end of the string, or the first invalid
               character.   Unless  "PERL_SCAN_SILENT_ILLDIGIT"  is  set  in  *flags,  encountering  an  invalid
               character  will  also  trigger  a  warning.   On  return *len is set to the length of the scanned
               string, and *flags gives output flags.

               If the value is <= UV_MAX it is returned as a UV, the output flags  are  clear,  and  nothing  is
               written   to   *result.   If   the   value   is   >   UV_MAX   "grok_hex"  returns  UV_MAX,  sets
               "PERL_SCAN_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX" in the output flags, and writes the  value  to  *result  (or  the
               value is discarded if result is NULL).

               The  hex number may optionally be prefixed with "0x" or "x" unless "PERL_SCAN_DISALLOW_PREFIX" is
               set in *flags on entry. If "PERL_SCAN_ALLOW_UNDERSCORES" is set in *flags then the hex number may
               use '_' characters to separate digits.

                       UV      grok_hex(const char* start, STRLEN* len_p,
                                        I32* flags, NV *result)

       grok_number
               Recognise (or not) a number.  The type of the number is returned (0 if  unrecognised),  otherwise
               it    is    a    bit-ORed    combination   of   IS_NUMBER_IN_UV,   IS_NUMBER_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX,
               IS_NUMBER_NOT_INT, IS_NUMBER_NEG, IS_NUMBER_INFINITY, IS_NUMBER_NAN (defined in perl.h).

               If the value of the number can fit an in UV, it is returned in the *valuep  IS_NUMBER_IN_UV  will
               be  set  to  indicate  that *valuep is valid, IS_NUMBER_IN_UV will never be set unless *valuep is
               valid, but *valuep may have been assigned to during processing even though IS_NUMBER_IN_UV is not
               set on return.  If valuep is NULL, IS_NUMBER_IN_UV will be set for the same cases as when  valuep
               is non-NULL, but no actual assignment (or SEGV) will occur.

               IS_NUMBER_NOT_INT  will be set with IS_NUMBER_IN_UV if trailing decimals were seen (in which case
               *valuep gives the true value truncated to  an  integer),  and  IS_NUMBER_NEG  if  the  number  is
               negative  (in  which  case  *valuep  holds  the absolute value).  IS_NUMBER_IN_UV is not set if e
               notation was used or the number is larger than a UV.

                       int     grok_number(const char *pv, STRLEN len,
                                           UV *valuep)

       grok_numeric_radix
               Scan and skip for a numeric decimal separator (radix).

                       bool    grok_numeric_radix(const char **sp,
                                                  const char *send)

       grok_oct
               converts a string representing an octal number to numeric form.

               On entry start and *len give the string to scan, *flags gives conversion flags, and result should
               be NULL or a pointer to an NV.  The scan stops at the end of the string,  or  the  first  invalid
               character.  Unless "PERL_SCAN_SILENT_ILLDIGIT" is set in *flags, encountering an 8 or 9 will also
               trigger  a  warning.  On return *len is set to the length of the scanned string, and *flags gives
               output flags.

               If the value is <= UV_MAX it is returned as a UV, the output flags  are  clear,  and  nothing  is
               written   to   *result.   If   the   value   is   >   UV_MAX   "grok_oct"  returns  UV_MAX,  sets
               "PERL_SCAN_GREATER_THAN_UV_MAX" in the output flags, and writes the  value  to  *result  (or  the
               value is discarded if result is NULL).

               If "PERL_SCAN_ALLOW_UNDERSCORES" is set in *flags then the octal number may use '_' characters to
               separate digits.

                       UV      grok_oct(const char* start, STRLEN* len_p,
                                        I32* flags, NV *result)

       Perl_signbit
               Return a non-zero integer if the sign bit on an NV is set, and 0 if it is not.

               If Configure detects this system has a signbit() that will work with our NVs, then we just use it
               via  the  #define in perl.h.  Otherwise, fall back on this implementation.  As a first pass, this
               gets everything right except -0.0.  Alas, catching -0.0 is the main use  for  this  function,  so
               this  is  not too helpful yet.  Still, at least we have the scaffolding in place to support other
               systems, should that prove useful.

               Configure notes:  This function is called 'Perl_signbit' instead of a plain 'signbit' because  it
               is easy to imagine a system having a signbit() function or macro that doesn't happen to work with
               our  particular  choice  of NVs.  We shouldn't just re-#define signbit as Perl_signbit and expect
               the standard system headers to be happy.  Also, this is a no-context function (no pTHX_)  because
               Perl_signbit() is usually re-#defined in perl.h as a simple macro call to the system's signbit().
               Users should just always call Perl_signbit().

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       int     Perl_signbit(NV f)

       scan_bin
               For backwards compatibility. Use "grok_bin" instead.

                       NV      scan_bin(const char* start, STRLEN len,
                                        STRLEN* retlen)

       scan_hex
               For backwards compatibility. Use "grok_hex" instead.

                       NV      scan_hex(const char* start, STRLEN len,
                                        STRLEN* retlen)

       scan_oct
               For backwards compatibility. Use "grok_oct" instead.

                       NV      scan_oct(const char* start, STRLEN len,
                                        STRLEN* retlen)

Optree construction

       newASSIGNOP
               Constructs,  checks,  and  returns an assignment op.  left and right supply the parameters of the
               assignment; they are consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.

               If optype is "OP_ANDASSIGN", "OP_ORASSIGN", or "OP_DORASSIGN", then a suitable conditional optree
               is constructed.  If optype is the opcode of a binary operator, such as "OP_BIT_OR", then an op is
               constructed that performs the binary operation and assigns  the  result  to  the  left  argument.
               Either way, if optype is non-zero then flags has no effect.

               If  optype  is  zero,  then  a  plain  scalar  or  list assignment is constructed.  Which type of
               assignment it is is automatically determined.  flags gives the eight bits of  "op_flags",  except
               that  "OPf_KIDS"  will  be  set  automatically,  and,  shifted  up  eight bits, the eight bits of
               "op_private", except that the bit with value 1 or 2 is automatically set as required.

                       OP *    newASSIGNOP(I32 flags, OP *left, I32 optype,
                                           OP *right)

       newBINOP
               Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any binary type.  type is the opcode.  flags  gives  the
               eight bits of "op_flags", except that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically, and, shifted up eight
               bits,  the eight bits of "op_private", except that the bit with value 1 or 2 is automatically set
               as required.  first and last supply up to two ops to be the direct children  of  the  binary  op;
               they are consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.

                       OP *    newBINOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first,
                                        OP *last)

       newCONDOP
               Constructs, checks, and returns a conditional-expression ("cond_expr") op.  flags gives the eight
               bits of "op_flags", except that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically, and, shifted up eight bits,
               the  eight  bits  of  "op_private", except that the bit with value 1 is automatically set.  first
               supplies the expression selecting between the two branches, and trueop  and  falseop  supply  the
               branches; they are consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.

                       OP *    newCONDOP(I32 flags, OP *first, OP *trueop,
                                         OP *falseop)

       newFOROP
               Constructs,  checks, and returns an op tree expressing a "foreach" loop (iteration through a list
               of values).  This is a heavyweight loop, with structure that allows exiting the  loop  by  "last"
               and suchlike.

               sv  optionally  supplies  the  variable  that  will  be aliased to each item in turn; if null, it
               defaults to $_ (either lexical or global).  expr supplies the list of  values  to  iterate  over.
               block  supplies  the  main body of the loop, and cont optionally supplies a "continue" block that
               operates as a second half of the body.  All of these optree inputs are consumed by this  function
               and become part of the constructed op tree.

               flags  gives  the eight bits of "op_flags" for the "leaveloop" op and, shifted up eight bits, the
               eight bits of "op_private" for the "leaveloop" op, except that (in both cases) some bits will  be
               set automatically.

                       OP *    newFOROP(I32 flags, OP *sv, OP *expr, OP *block,
                                        OP *cont)

       newGIVENOP
               Constructs,  checks,  and  returns  an  op  tree  expressing  a "given" block.  cond supplies the
               expression that will be locally assigned to a lexical variable, and block supplies  the  body  of
               the  "given"  construct; they are consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op
               tree.  defsv_off is the pad offset of the scalar lexical variable that will be affected.   If  it
               is 0, the global $_ will be used.

                       OP *    newGIVENOP(OP *cond, OP *block,
                                          PADOFFSET defsv_off)

       newGVOP Constructs,  checks,  and  returns an op of any type that involves an embedded reference to a GV.
               type is the opcode.  flags gives the eight bits of "op_flags".  gv identifies the GV that the  op
               should reference; calling this function does not transfer ownership of any reference to it.

                       OP *    newGVOP(I32 type, I32 flags, GV *gv)

       newLISTOP
               Constructs,  checks,  and  returns  an op of any list type.  type is the opcode.  flags gives the
               eight bits of "op_flags", except that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically  if  required.   first
               and  last  supply  up  to two ops to be direct children of the list op; they are consumed by this
               function and become part of the constructed op tree.

                       OP *    newLISTOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first,
                                         OP *last)

       newLOGOP
               Constructs, checks, and returns a logical (flow control) op.  type is the  opcode.   flags  gives
               the  eight  bits of "op_flags", except that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically, and, shifted up
               eight bits, the eight bits of "op_private", except that the bit with  value  1  is  automatically
               set.  first supplies the expression controlling the flow, and other supplies the side (alternate)
               chain of ops; they are consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.

                       OP *    newLOGOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first,
                                        OP *other)

       newLOOPEX
               Constructs,  checks,  and  returns  a  loop-exiting  op  (such as "goto" or "last").  type is the
               opcode.  label supplies the parameter determining the target of the op; it is  consumed  by  this
               function and becomes part of the constructed op tree.

                       OP *    newLOOPEX(I32 type, OP *label)

       newLOOPOP
               Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a loop.  This is only a loop in the control
               flow through the op tree; it does not have the heavyweight loop structure that allows exiting the
               loop  by  "last"  and  suchlike.   flags gives the eight bits of "op_flags" for the top-level op,
               except that some bits will be set  automatically  as  required.   expr  supplies  the  expression
               controlling  loop  iteration,  and block supplies the body of the loop; they are consumed by this
               function and become part of the constructed op tree.  debuggable is currently unused  and  should
               always be 1.

                       OP *    newLOOPOP(I32 flags, I32 debuggable, OP *expr,
                                         OP *block)

       newNULLLIST
               Constructs, checks, and returns a new "stub" op, which represents an empty list expression.

                       OP *    newNULLLIST()

       newOP   Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any base type (any type that has no extra fields).  type
               is  the  opcode.  flags gives the eight bits of "op_flags", and, shifted up eight bits, the eight
               bits of "op_private".

                       OP *    newOP(I32 type, I32 flags)

       newPADOP
               Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any type that involves a reference  to  a  pad  element.
               type  is  the  opcode.   flags  gives  the eight bits of "op_flags".  A pad slot is automatically
               allocated, and is populated with sv; this function takes ownership of one reference to it.

               This function only exists if Perl has been compiled to use ithreads.

                       OP *    newPADOP(I32 type, I32 flags, SV *sv)

       newPMOP Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any pattern matching type.  type is the  opcode.   flags
               gives the eight bits of "op_flags" and, shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of "op_private".

                       OP *    newPMOP(I32 type, I32 flags)

       newPVOP Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any type that involves an embedded C-level pointer (PV).
               type  is the opcode.  flags gives the eight bits of "op_flags".  pv supplies the C-level pointer,
               which must have been allocated using "PerlMemShared_malloc"; the memory will be freed when the op
               is destroyed.

                       OP *    newPVOP(I32 type, I32 flags, char *pv)

       newRANGE
               Constructs and returns a "range" op, with subordinate "flip" and "flop"  ops.   flags  gives  the
               eight  bits  of  "op_flags"  for  the  "flip"  op  and,  shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of
               "op_private" for both the  "flip"  and  "range"  ops,  except  that  the  bit  with  value  1  is
               automatically set.  left and right supply the expressions controlling the endpoints of the range;
               they are consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.

                       OP *    newRANGE(I32 flags, OP *left, OP *right)

       newSLICEOP
               Constructs,  checks,  and  returns  an  "lslice"  (list slice) op.  flags gives the eight bits of
               "op_flags", except that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically, and, shifted  up  eight  bits,  the
               eight  bits  of  "op_private",  except  that  the  bit  with value 1 or 2 is automatically set as
               required.  listval and subscript supply the parameters of the slice; they are  consumed  by  this
               function and become part of the constructed op tree.

                       OP *    newSLICEOP(I32 flags, OP *subscript,
                                          OP *listval)

       newSTATEOP
               Constructs  a state op (COP).  The state op is normally a "nextstate" op, but will be a "dbstate"
               op if debugging is  enabled  for  currently-compiled  code.   The  state  op  is  populated  from
               "PL_curcop" (or "PL_compiling").  If label is non-null, it supplies the name of a label to attach
               to  the  state op; this function takes ownership of the memory pointed at by label, and will free
               it.  flags gives the eight bits of "op_flags" for the state op.

               If o is null, the state op is returned.  Otherwise the  state  op  is  combined  with  o  into  a
               "lineseq"  list  op,  which  is returned.  o is consumed by this function and becomes part of the
               returned op tree.

                       OP *    newSTATEOP(I32 flags, char *label, OP *o)

       newSVOP Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any type that involves an  embedded  SV.   type  is  the
               opcode.   flags  gives  the  eight  bits of "op_flags".  sv gives the SV to embed in the op; this
               function takes ownership of one reference to it.

                       OP *    newSVOP(I32 type, I32 flags, SV *sv)

       newUNOP Constructs, checks, and returns an op of any unary type.  type is the opcode.   flags  gives  the
               eight  bits  of  "op_flags",  except  that "OPf_KIDS" will be set automatically if required, and,
               shifted up eight bits, the eight bits of "op_private", except  that  the  bit  with  value  1  is
               automatically  set.   first supplies an optional op to be the direct child of the unary op; it is
               consumed by this function and become part of the constructed op tree.

                       OP *    newUNOP(I32 type, I32 flags, OP *first)

       newWHENOP
               Constructs, checks, and returns an op tree expressing a "when" block.   cond  supplies  the  test
               expression,  and  block  supplies  the block that will be executed if the test evaluates to true;
               they are consumed by this function and become part of the constructed  op  tree.   cond  will  be
               interpreted DWIMically, often as a comparison against $_, and may be null to generate a "default"
               block.

                       OP *    newWHENOP(OP *cond, OP *block)

       newWHILEOP
               Constructs,  checks,  and  returns  an  op tree expressing a "while" loop.  This is a heavyweight
               loop, with structure that allows exiting the loop by "last" and suchlike.

               loop is an optional preconstructed "enterloop" op to use in the  loop;  if  it  is  null  then  a
               suitable  op will be constructed automatically.  expr supplies the loop's controlling expression.
               block supplies the main body of the loop, and cont optionally supplies a  "continue"  block  that
               operates  as a second half of the body.  All of these optree inputs are consumed by this function
               and become part of the constructed op tree.

               flags gives the eight bits of "op_flags" for the "leaveloop" op and, shifted up eight  bits,  the
               eight  bits of "op_private" for the "leaveloop" op, except that (in both cases) some bits will be
               set automatically.  debuggable is currently unused  and  should  always  be  1.   has_my  can  be
               supplied as true to force the loop body to be enclosed in its own scope.

                       OP *    newWHILEOP(I32 flags, I32 debuggable,
                                          LOOP *loop, OP *expr, OP *block,
                                          OP *cont, I32 has_my)

Optree Manipulation Functions

       ck_entersub_args_list
               Performs  the  default  fixup  of  the arguments part of an "entersub" op tree.  This consists of
               applying list context to each of the argument ops.  This is the standard treatment used on a call
               marked with "&", or a method call, or a call through a subroutine reference, or  any  other  call
               where  the  callee  can't  be  identified  at  compile  time,  or  a call where the callee has no
               prototype.

                       OP *    ck_entersub_args_list(OP *entersubop)

       ck_entersub_args_proto
               Performs the fixup of the arguments  part  of  an  "entersub"  op  tree  based  on  a  subroutine
               prototype.   This  makes  various  modifications to the argument ops, from applying context up to
               inserting "refgen" ops, and checking the number and syntactic types of arguments, as directed  by
               the  prototype.   This  is the standard treatment used on a subroutine call, not marked with "&",
               where the callee can be identified at compile time and has a prototype.

               protosv supplies the subroutine prototype to be applied to the call.  It may be a normal  defined
               scalar,  of  which  the  string  value will be used.  Alternatively, for convenience, it may be a
               subroutine object (a "CV*" that has been cast to "SV*") which has  a  prototype.   The  prototype
               supplied, in whichever form, does not need to match the actual callee referenced by the op tree.

               If  the argument ops disagree with the prototype, for example by having an unacceptable number of
               arguments, a valid op tree is returned anyway.  The error  is  reflected  in  the  parser  state,
               normally  resulting  in  a  single  exception  at  the  top level of parsing which covers all the
               compilation errors that occurred.  In the error message, the callee is referred to  by  the  name
               defined by the namegv parameter.

                       OP *    ck_entersub_args_proto(OP *entersubop,
                                                      GV *namegv, SV *protosv)

       ck_entersub_args_proto_or_list
               Performs  the  fixup  of the arguments part of an "entersub" op tree either based on a subroutine
               prototype or using default list-context processing.  This is the standard  treatment  used  on  a
               subroutine call, not marked with "&", where the callee can be identified at compile time.

               protosv  supplies  the subroutine prototype to be applied to the call, or indicates that there is
               no prototype.  It may be a normal scalar, in which case if it is defined then  the  string  value
               will  be  used as a prototype, and if it is undefined then there is no prototype.  Alternatively,
               for convenience, it may be a subroutine object (a "CV*" that has been cast to  "SV*"),  of  which
               the prototype will be used if it has one.  The prototype (or lack thereof) supplied, in whichever
               form, does not need to match the actual callee referenced by the op tree.

               If  the argument ops disagree with the prototype, for example by having an unacceptable number of
               arguments, a valid op tree is returned anyway.  The error  is  reflected  in  the  parser  state,
               normally  resulting  in  a  single  exception  at  the  top level of parsing which covers all the
               compilation errors that occurred.  In the error message, the callee is referred to  by  the  name
               defined by the namegv parameter.

                       OP *    ck_entersub_args_proto_or_list(OP *entersubop,
                                                              GV *namegv,
                                                              SV *protosv)

       cv_const_sv
               If  "cv" is a constant sub eligible for inlining. returns the constant value returned by the sub.
               Otherwise, returns NULL.

               Constant subs can be created with "newCONSTSUB"  or  as  described  in  "Constant  Functions"  in
               perlsub.

                       SV*     cv_const_sv(const CV *const cv)

       cv_get_call_checker
               Retrieves  the  function that will be used to fix up a call to cv.  Specifically, the function is
               applied to an "entersub" op tree for a subroutine call, not marked with "&", where the callee can
               be identified at compile time as cv.

               The C-level function pointer is returned in *ckfun_p, and an SV argument for it  is  returned  in
               *ckobj_p.  The function is intended to be called in this manner:

                   entersubop = (*ckfun_p)(aTHX_ entersubop, namegv, (*ckobj_p));

               In  this  call,  entersubop is a pointer to the "entersub" op, which may be replaced by the check
               function, and namegv is a GV supplying the name that should be used  by  the  check  function  to
               refer to the callee of the "entersub" op if it needs to emit any diagnostics.  It is permitted to
               apply  the check function in non-standard situations, such as to a call to a different subroutine
               or to a method call.

               By default, the function is Perl_ck_entersub_args_proto_or_list,  and  the  SV  parameter  is  cv
               itself.   This  implements  standard  prototype  processing.  It can be changed, for a particular
               subroutine, by "cv_set_call_checker".

                       void    cv_get_call_checker(CV *cv,
                                                   Perl_call_checker *ckfun_p,
                                                   SV **ckobj_p)

       cv_set_call_checker
               Sets the function that will be used to fix up a  call  to  cv.   Specifically,  the  function  is
               applied to an "entersub" op tree for a subroutine call, not marked with "&", where the callee can
               be identified at compile time as cv.

               The  C-level  function  pointer  is  supplied  in ckfun, and an SV argument for it is supplied in
               ckobj.  The function is intended to be called in this manner:

                   entersubop = ckfun(aTHX_ entersubop, namegv, ckobj);

               In this call, entersubop is a pointer to the "entersub" op, which may be replaced  by  the  check
               function,  and  namegv  is  a  GV supplying the name that should be used by the check function to
               refer to the callee of the "entersub" op if it needs to emit any diagnostics.  It is permitted to
               apply the check function in non-standard situations, such as to a call to a different  subroutine
               or to a method call.

               The current setting for a particular CV can be retrieved by "cv_get_call_checker".

                       void    cv_set_call_checker(CV *cv,
                                                   Perl_call_checker ckfun,
                                                   SV *ckobj)

       LINKLIST
               Given  the  root  of an optree, link the tree in execution order using the "op_next" pointers and
               return the first op executed. If this  has  already  been  done,  it  will  not  be  redone,  and
               "o->op_next"  will  be  returned.  If  "o->op_next"  is  not already set, o should be at least an
               "UNOP".

                       OP*     LINKLIST(OP *o)

       newCONSTSUB
               See "newCONSTSUB_flags".

                       CV*     newCONSTSUB(HV* stash, const char* name, SV* sv)

       newCONSTSUB_flags
               Creates a constant sub equivalent to Perl "sub FOO () { 123 }" which is eligible for inlining  at
               compile-time.

               Currently, the only useful value for "flags" is SVf_UTF8.

               The newly created subroutine takes ownership of a reference to the passed in SV.

               Passing  NULL  for SV creates a constant sub equivalent to "sub BAR () {}", which won't be called
               if used as a destructor, but will suppress the overhead of a call  to  "AUTOLOAD".   (This  form,
               however, isn't eligible for inlining at compile time.)

                       CV*     newCONSTSUB_flags(HV* stash, const char* name,
                                                 STRLEN len, U32 flags, SV* sv)

       newXS   Used  by  "xsubpp"  to hook up XSUBs as Perl subs.  filename needs to be static storage, as it is
               used directly as CvFILE(), without a copy being made.

       op_append_elem
               Append an item to the list of ops  contained  directly  within  a  list-type  op,  returning  the
               lengthened  list.   first  is the list-type op, and last is the op to append to the list.  optype
               specifies the intended opcode for the list.  If first is not already a list of the right type, it
               will be upgraded into one.  If either first or last is null, the other is returned unchanged.

                       OP *    op_append_elem(I32 optype, OP *first, OP *last)

       op_append_list
               Concatenate the lists of ops contained directly within two list-type ops, returning the  combined
               list.  first and last are the list-type ops to concatenate.  optype specifies the intended opcode
               for  the  list.   If  either  first  or  last is not already a list of the right type, it will be
               upgraded into one.  If either first or last is null, the other is returned unchanged.

                       OP *    op_append_list(I32 optype, OP *first, OP *last)

       OP_CLASS
               Return the class of the provided OP: that is, which of the *OP structures it uses. For  core  ops
               this  currently  gets  the information out of PL_opargs, which does not always accurately reflect
               the type used.  For custom ops the type is returned from the registration, and it is  up  to  the
               registree  to  ensure  it  is accurate. The value returned will be one of the OA_* constants from
               op.h.

                       U32     OP_CLASS(OP *o)

       OP_DESC Return a short description of the provided OP.

                       const char * OP_DESC(OP *o)

       op_linklist
               This function is the implementation of the "LINKLIST" macro. It should not be called directly.

                       OP*     op_linklist(OP *o)

       op_lvalue
               Propagate lvalue ("modifiable") context to an op and its children.  type represents  the  context
               type,  roughly  based  on  the  type  of  op  that  would do the modifying, although "local()" is
               represented by OP_NULL, because it has no op type of its own (it is signalled by a  flag  on  the
               lvalue op).

               This  function  detects  things  that can't be modified, such as "$x+1", and generates errors for
               them. For example, "$x+1 = 2" would cause it to be called with an op of type OP_ADD and a  "type"
               argument of OP_SASSIGN.

               It  also flags things that need to behave specially in an lvalue context, such as "$$x = 5" which
               might have to vivify a reference in $x.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       OP *    op_lvalue(OP *o, I32 type)

       OP_NAME Return the name of the provided OP. For core ops this looks up the name  from  the  op_type;  for
               custom ops from the op_ppaddr.

                       const char * OP_NAME(OP *o)

       op_prepend_elem
               Prepend  an  item  to  the  list  of  ops contained directly within a list-type op, returning the
               lengthened list.  first is the op to prepend to the list, and last is the list-type  op.   optype
               specifies  the intended opcode for the list.  If last is not already a list of the right type, it
               will be upgraded into one.  If either first or last is null, the other is returned unchanged.

                       OP *    op_prepend_elem(I32 optype, OP *first, OP *last)

       op_scope
               Wraps up an op tree with some additional ops so that at runtime a dynamic scope will be  created.
               The  original  ops  run in the new dynamic scope, and then, provided that they exit normally, the
               scope will be unwound.  The additional ops used to create  and  unwind  the  dynamic  scope  will
               normally  be  an "enter"/"leave" pair, but a "scope" op may be used instead if the ops are simple
               enough to not need the full dynamic scope structure.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       OP *    op_scope(OP *o)

       rv2cv_op_cv
               Examines an op, which is expected to identify a subroutine at runtime, and attempts to  determine
               at compile time which subroutine it identifies.  This is normally used during Perl compilation to
               determine  whether  a  prototype  can  be  applied  to  a  function  call.   cvop is the op being
               considered, normally an "rv2cv" op.  A pointer to the identified subroutine is  returned,  if  it
               could  be  determined  statically,  and  a  null  pointer  is  returned if it was not possible to
               determine statically.

               Currently, the subroutine can be identified statically if the RV that the "rv2cv" is  to  operate
               on  is  provided  by a suitable "gv" or "const" op.  A "gv" op is suitable if the GV's CV slot is
               populated.  A "const" op is suitable if the constant value must  be  an  RV  pointing  to  a  CV.
               Details  of  this  process  may  change  in  future  versions of Perl.  If the "rv2cv" op has the
               "OPpENTERSUB_AMPER" flag set then no attempt is made to identify the subroutine statically:  this
               flag  is  used  to  suppress  compile-time  magic on a subroutine call, forcing it to use default
               runtime behaviour.

               If flags has the bit "RV2CVOPCV_MARK_EARLY" set, then the handling of a GV reference is modified.
               If a GV was examined and its  CV  slot  was  found  to  be  empty,  then  the  "gv"  op  has  the
               "OPpEARLY_CV" flag set.  If the op is not optimised away, and the CV slot is later populated with
               a  subroutine  having a prototype, that flag eventually triggers the warning "called too early to
               check prototype".

               If flags has the bit "RV2CVOPCV_RETURN_NAME_GV" set, then instead of returning a pointer  to  the
               subroutine  it returns a pointer to the GV giving the most appropriate name for the subroutine in
               this context.  Normally this is  just  the  "CvGV"  of  the  subroutine,  but  for  an  anonymous
               ("CvANON")  subroutine  that  is  referenced  through  a  GV  it will be the referencing GV.  The
               resulting "GV*" is cast to "CV*" to be returned.  A null pointer is returned as usual if there is
               no statically-determinable subroutine.

                       CV *    rv2cv_op_cv(OP *cvop, U32 flags)

Pad Data Structures

       CvPADLIST
               CV's can have CvPADLIST(cv) set to point to a PADLIST.  This is the CV's scratchpad, which stores
               lexical variables and opcode temporary and per-thread values.

               For these purposes "formats" are a kind-of CV; eval""s are too (except they're  not  callable  at
               will  and are always thrown away after the eval"" is done executing).  Require'd files are simply
               evals without any outer lexical scope.

               XSUBs don't have CvPADLIST set - dXSTARG fetches values from PL_curpad, but that  is  really  the
               callers pad (a slot of which is allocated by every entersub).

               The PADLIST has a C array where pads are stored.

               The 0th entry of the PADLIST is a PADNAMELIST (which is actually just an AV, but that may change)
               which  represents  the  "names"  or  rather  the  "static  type  information"  for lexicals.  The
               individual elements of a PADNAMELIST are PADNAMEs  (just  SVs;  but,  again,  that  may  change).
               Future refactorings might stop the PADNAMELIST from being stored in the PADLIST's array, so don't
               rely on it.  See "PadlistNAMES".

               The  CvDEPTH'th  entry  of  a  PADLIST is a PAD (an AV) which is the stack frame at that depth of
               recursion into the CV.  The 0th slot of a frame AV is an AV  which  is  @_.   Other  entries  are
               storage for variables and op targets.

               Iterating  over  the  PADNAMELIST  iterates  over  all  possible  pad  items.  Pad slots that are
               SVs_PADTMP (targets/GVs/constants) end up having &PL_sv_undef "names" (see pad_alloc()).

               Only  my/our  variable  (SvPADMY/PADNAME_isOUR)  slots  get  valid  names.   The  rest   are   op
               targets/GVs/constants  which  are  statically allocated or resolved at compile time.  These don't
               have names by which they can be looked up from Perl code at  run  time  through  eval""  the  way
               my/our  variables  can  be.   Since  they  can't  be  looked up by "name" but only by their index
               allocated at compile time (which is usually in  PL_op->op_targ),  wasting  a  name  SV  for  them
               doesn't make sense.

               The SVs in the names AV have their PV being the name of the variable.  xlow+1..xhigh inclusive in
               the  NV  union  is  a  range of cop_seq numbers for which the name is valid (accessed through the
               macros COP_SEQ_RANGE_LOW and _HIGH).  During compilation, these fields may hold the special value
               PERL_PADSEQ_INTRO to indicate various stages:

                  COP_SEQ_RANGE_LOW        _HIGH
                  -----------------        -----
                  PERL_PADSEQ_INTRO            0   variable not yet introduced:   { my ($x
                  valid-seq#   PERL_PADSEQ_INTRO   variable in scope:             { my ($x)
                  valid-seq#          valid-seq#   compilation of scope complete: { my ($x) }

               For typed lexicals name SV is SVt_PVMG and SvSTASH points at the type.  For "our"  lexicals,  the
               type  is  also  SVt_PVMG, with the SvOURSTASH slot pointing at the stash of the associated global
               (so that duplicate "our" declarations in the same package can be detected).  SvUVX  is  sometimes
               hijacked to store the generation number during compilation.

               If  PADNAME_OUTER  (SvFAKE)  is set on the name SV, then that slot in the frame AV is a REFCNT'ed
               reference to a lexical from "outside". In this case, the name SV does not use xlow and  xhigh  to
               store  a  cop_seq  range,  since  it  is  in  scope  throughout.  Instead xhigh stores some flags
               containing info about the real lexical (is it declared in an anon, and is  it  capable  of  being
               instantiated  multiple  times?),  and for fake ANONs, xlow contains the index within the parent's
               pad where the lexical's value is stored, to make cloning quicker.

               If the 'name' is '&' the corresponding entry in the PAD is a CV representing a possible  closure.
               (PADNAME_OUTER  and  name of '&' is not a meaningful combination currently but could become so if
               "my sub foo {}" is implemented.)

               Note that formats are treated as anon subs,  and  are  cloned  each  time  write  is  called  (if
               necessary).

               The  flag  SVs_PADSTALE  is  cleared on lexicals each time the my() is executed, and set on scope
               exit.  This allows the 'Variable $x is not available' warning to be generated in evals, such as

                   { my $x = 1; sub f { eval '$x'} } f();

               For state vars, SVs_PADSTALE is overloaded to mean 'not yet initialised'.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       PADLIST * CvPADLIST(CV *cv)

       PadARRAY
               The C array of pad entries.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SV **   PadARRAY(PAD pad)

       PadlistARRAY
               The C array of a padlist, containing the pads.  Only subscript it with numbers >= 1, as  the  0th
               entry is not guaranteed to remain usable.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       PAD **  PadlistARRAY(PADLIST padlist)

       PadlistMAX
               The index of the last pad in the padlist.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SSize_t PadlistMAX(PADLIST padlist)

       PadlistNAMES
               The names associated with pad entries.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       PADNAMELIST * PadlistNAMES(PADLIST padlist)

       PadlistNAMESARRAY
               The C array of pad names.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       PADNAME ** PadlistNAMESARRAY(PADLIST padlist)

       PadlistNAMESMAX
               The index of the last pad name.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SSize_t PadlistNAMESMAX(PADLIST padlist)

       PadlistREFCNT
               The reference count of the padlist.  Currently this is always 1.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       U32     PadlistREFCNT(PADLIST padlist)

       PadMAX  The index of the last pad entry.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SSize_t PadMAX(PAD pad)

       PadnameLEN
               The length of the name.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       STRLEN  PadnameLEN(PADNAME pn)

       PadnamelistARRAY
               The C array of pad names.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       PADNAME ** PadnamelistARRAY(PADNAMELIST pnl)

       PadnamelistMAX
               The index of the last pad name.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SSize_t PadnamelistMAX(PADNAMELIST pnl)

       PadnamePV
               The name stored in the pad name struct.  This returns NULL for a target or GV slot.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       char *  PadnamePV(PADNAME pn)

       PadnameSV
               Returns  the  pad  name  as  an  SV.  This is currently just "pn".  It will begin returning a new
               mortal SV if pad names ever stop being SVs.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SV *    PadnameSV(PADNAME pn)

       PadnameUTF8
               Whether PadnamePV is in UTF8.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       bool    PadnameUTF8(PADNAME pn)

       pad_add_name_pvs
               Exactly like "pad_add_name_pvn", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       PADOFFSET pad_add_name_pvs(const char *name, U32 flags,
                                                  HV *typestash, HV *ourstash)

       pad_findmy_pvs
               Exactly like "pad_findmy_pvn", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       PADOFFSET pad_findmy_pvs(const char *name, U32 flags)

       pad_new Create a new padlist, updating the global variables for the currently-compiling padlist to  point
               to the new padlist.  The following flags can be OR'ed together:

                   padnew_CLONE        this pad is for a cloned CV
                   padnew_SAVE         save old globals on the save stack
                   padnew_SAVESUB      also save extra stuff for start of sub

                       PADLIST * pad_new(int flags)

       PL_comppad
               During  compilation,  this  points  to  the  array  containing the values part of the pad for the
               currently-compiling code.  (At runtime a CV may have many such value arrays; at compile time just
               one is constructed.)  At runtime, this points to  the  array  containing  the  currently-relevant
               values for the pad for the currently-executing code.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

       PL_comppad_name
               During  compilation,  this  points  to  the  array  containing  the names part of the pad for the
               currently-compiling code.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

       PL_curpad
               Points directly to the body of the "PL_comppad" array.  (I.e., this is "PAD_ARRAY(PL_comppad)".)

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

Per-Interpreter Variables

       PL_modglobal
               "PL_modglobal" is a general purpose, interpreter global HV for use by  extensions  that  need  to
               keep  information  on a per-interpreter basis.  In a pinch, it can also be used as a symbol table
               for extensions to share data among each other.  It is a good idea to use  keys  prefixed  by  the
               package name of the extension that owns the data.

                       HV*     PL_modglobal

       PL_na   A convenience variable which is typically used with "SvPV" when one doesn't care about the length
               of  the  string.   It  is  usually more efficient to either declare a local variable and use that
               instead or to use the "SvPV_nolen" macro.

                       STRLEN  PL_na

       PL_opfreehook
               When non-"NULL", the function pointed by this variable will be called each time an  OP  is  freed
               with  the  corresponding  OP as the argument.  This allows extensions to free any extra attribute
               they have locally attached to an OP.  It is also assured to first fire for the parent OP and then
               for its kids.

               When you replace this variable, it is considered a good practice to store the possibly previously
               installed hook and that you recall it inside your own.

                       Perl_ophook_t   PL_opfreehook

       PL_peepp
               Pointer to the per-subroutine peephole optimiser.  This is a function that gets called at the end
               of compilation of a Perl subroutine (or equivalently independent piece of Perl code)  to  perform
               fixups  of  some  ops  and to perform small-scale optimisations.  The function is called once for
               each subroutine that is compiled, and is passed, as sole parameter, a pointer to the op  that  is
               the entry point to the subroutine.  It modifies the op tree in place.

               The  peephole  optimiser should never be completely replaced.  Rather, add code to it by wrapping
               the existing optimiser.  The basic way to do this can  be  seen  in  "Compile  pass  3:  peephole
               optimization"  in perlguts.  If the new code wishes to operate on ops throughout the subroutine's
               structure, rather than just at the top level, it is likely to be  more  convenient  to  wrap  the
               "PL_rpeepp" hook.

                       peep_t  PL_peepp

       PL_rpeepp
               Pointer  to  the recursive peephole optimiser.  This is a function that gets called at the end of
               compilation of a Perl subroutine (or equivalently independent piece  of  Perl  code)  to  perform
               fixups  of  some  ops  and to perform small-scale optimisations.  The function is called once for
               each chain of ops linked through their "op_next" fields; it is recursively called to handle  each
               side  chain.   It  is  passed,  as sole parameter, a pointer to the op that is at the head of the
               chain.  It modifies the op tree in place.

               The peephole optimiser should never be completely replaced.  Rather, add code to it  by  wrapping
               the  existing  optimiser.   The  basic  way  to  do this can be seen in "Compile pass 3: peephole
               optimization" in perlguts.  If the new code wishes to operate only on ops at a  subroutine's  top
               level,  rather  than  throughout  the  structure,  it is likely to be more convenient to wrap the
               "PL_peepp" hook.

                       peep_t  PL_rpeepp

       PL_sv_no
               This is the "false" SV.  See "PL_sv_yes".  Always refer to this as &PL_sv_no.

                       SV      PL_sv_no

       PL_sv_undef
               This is the "undef" SV.  Always refer to this as &PL_sv_undef.

                       SV      PL_sv_undef

       PL_sv_yes
               This is the "true" SV.  See "PL_sv_no".  Always refer to this as &PL_sv_yes.

                       SV      PL_sv_yes

REGEXP Functions

       SvRX    Convenience macro to get the REGEXP from a SV. This is approximately equivalent to the  following
               snippet:

                   if (SvMAGICAL(sv))
                       mg_get(sv);
                   if (SvROK(sv))
                       sv = MUTABLE_SV(SvRV(sv));
                   if (SvTYPE(sv) == SVt_REGEXP)
                       return (REGEXP*) sv;

               NULL will be returned if a REGEXP* is not found.

                       REGEXP * SvRX(SV *sv)

       SvRXOK  Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV (or the one it references) is a REGEXP.

               If you want to do something with the REGEXP* later use SvRX instead and check for NULL.

                       bool    SvRXOK(SV* sv)

Simple Exception Handling Macros

       dXCPT   Set up necessary local variables for exception handling.  See "Exception Handling" in perlguts.

                               dXCPT;

       XCPT_CATCH
               Introduces a catch block.  See "Exception Handling" in perlguts.

       XCPT_RETHROW
               Rethrows a previously caught exception.  See "Exception Handling" in perlguts.

                               XCPT_RETHROW;

       XCPT_TRY_END
               Ends a try block.  See "Exception Handling" in perlguts.

       XCPT_TRY_START
               Starts a try block.  See "Exception Handling" in perlguts.

Stack Manipulation Macros

       dMARK   Declare a stack marker variable, "mark", for the XSUB.  See "MARK" and "dORIGMARK".

                               dMARK;

       dORIGMARK
               Saves the original stack mark for the XSUB.  See "ORIGMARK".

                               dORIGMARK;

       dSP     Declares  a  local  copy of perl's stack pointer for the XSUB, available via the "SP" macro.  See
               "SP".

                               dSP;

       EXTEND  Used to extend the argument stack for an XSUB's return values. Once used, guarantees  that  there
               is room for at least "nitems" to be pushed onto the stack.

                       void    EXTEND(SP, int nitems)

       MARK    Stack marker variable for the XSUB.  See "dMARK".

       mPUSHi  Push an integer onto the stack.  The stack must have room for this element.  Does not use "TARG".
               See also "PUSHi", "mXPUSHi" and "XPUSHi".

                       void    mPUSHi(IV iv)

       mPUSHn  Push  a  double onto the stack.  The stack must have room for this element.  Does not use "TARG".
               See also "PUSHn", "mXPUSHn" and "XPUSHn".

                       void    mPUSHn(NV nv)

       mPUSHp  Push a string onto the stack.  The stack must have room for this element.   The  "len"  indicates
               the length of the string.  Does not use "TARG".  See also "PUSHp", "mXPUSHp" and "XPUSHp".

                       void    mPUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)

       mPUSHs  Push  an  SV  onto  the  stack and mortalizes the SV.  The stack must have room for this element.
               Does not use "TARG".  See also "PUSHs" and "mXPUSHs".

                       void    mPUSHs(SV* sv)

       mPUSHu  Push an unsigned integer onto the stack.  The stack must have room for this  element.   Does  not
               use "TARG".  See also "PUSHu", "mXPUSHu" and "XPUSHu".

                       void    mPUSHu(UV uv)

       mXPUSHi Push an integer onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.  Does not use "TARG".  See also
               "XPUSHi", "mPUSHi" and "PUSHi".

                       void    mXPUSHi(IV iv)

       mXPUSHn Push  a  double onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.  Does not use "TARG".  See also
               "XPUSHn", "mPUSHn" and "PUSHn".

                       void    mXPUSHn(NV nv)

       mXPUSHp Push a string onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.  The "len" indicates  the  length
               of the string.  Does not use "TARG".  See also "XPUSHp", "mPUSHp" and "PUSHp".

                       void    mXPUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)

       mXPUSHs Push  an SV onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary and mortalizes the SV.  Does not use
               "TARG".  See also "XPUSHs" and "mPUSHs".

                       void    mXPUSHs(SV* sv)

       mXPUSHu Push an unsigned integer onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.  Does not use  "TARG".
               See also "XPUSHu", "mPUSHu" and "PUSHu".

                       void    mXPUSHu(UV uv)

       ORIGMARK
               The original stack mark for the XSUB.  See "dORIGMARK".

       POPi    Pops an integer off the stack.

                       IV      POPi

       POPl    Pops a long off the stack.

                       long    POPl

       POPn    Pops a double off the stack.

                       NV      POPn

       POPp    Pops a string off the stack.

                       char*   POPp

       POPpbytex
               Pops a string off the stack which must consist of bytes i.e. characters < 256.

                       char*   POPpbytex

       POPpx   Pops a string off the stack.  Identical to POPp.  There are two names for historical reasons.

                       char*   POPpx

       POPs    Pops an SV off the stack.

                       SV*     POPs

       PUSHi   Push an integer onto the stack.  The stack must have room for this element.  Handles 'set' magic.
               Uses  "TARG",  so  "dTARGET"  or  "dXSTARG" should be called to declare it.  Do not call multiple
               "TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's - see "mPUSHi" instead.  See also "XPUSHi" and
               "mXPUSHi".

                       void    PUSHi(IV iv)

       PUSHMARK
               Opening bracket for arguments on a callback.  See "PUTBACK" and perlcall.

                       void    PUSHMARK(SP)

       PUSHmortal
               Push a new mortal SV onto the stack.  The stack must have room for this element.   Does  not  use
               "TARG".  See also "PUSHs", "XPUSHmortal" and "XPUSHs".

                       void    PUSHmortal()

       PUSHn   Push  a  double onto the stack.  The stack must have room for this element.  Handles 'set' magic.
               Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET" or "dXSTARG" should be called to declare  it.   Do  not  call  multiple
               "TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's - see "mPUSHn" instead.  See also "XPUSHn" and
               "mXPUSHn".

                       void    PUSHn(NV nv)

       PUSHp   Push  a  string  onto the stack.  The stack must have room for this element.  The "len" indicates
               the length of the string.  Handles 'set' magic.  Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET" or "dXSTARG" should be
               called to declare it.  Do not call multiple "TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's  -
               see "mPUSHp" instead.  See also "XPUSHp" and "mXPUSHp".

                       void    PUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)

       PUSHs   Push  an  SV  onto  the stack.  The stack must have room for this element.  Does not handle 'set'
               magic.  Does not use "TARG".  See also "PUSHmortal", "XPUSHs" and "XPUSHmortal".

                       void    PUSHs(SV* sv)

       PUSHu   Push an unsigned integer onto the stack.  The stack must have room  for  this  element.   Handles
               'set' magic.  Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET" or "dXSTARG" should be called to declare it.  Do not call
               multiple  "TARG"-oriented  macros  to  return lists from XSUB's - see "mPUSHu" instead.  See also
               "XPUSHu" and "mXPUSHu".

                       void    PUSHu(UV uv)

       PUTBACK Closing bracket for XSUB arguments.  This is usually handled by  "xsubpp".   See  "PUSHMARK"  and
               perlcall for other uses.

                               PUTBACK;

       SP      Stack pointer.  This is usually handled by "xsubpp".  See "dSP" and "SPAGAIN".

       SPAGAIN Refetch the stack pointer.  Used after a callback.  See perlcall.

                               SPAGAIN;

       XPUSHi  Push  an  integer  onto  the stack, extending the stack if necessary.  Handles 'set' magic.  Uses
               "TARG", so "dTARGET" or "dXSTARG"  should  be  called  to  declare  it.   Do  not  call  multiple
               "TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's - see "mXPUSHi" instead.  See also "PUSHi" and
               "mPUSHi".

                       void    XPUSHi(IV iv)

       XPUSHmortal
               Push a new mortal SV onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.  Does not use "TARG".  See
               also "XPUSHs", "PUSHmortal" and "PUSHs".

                       void    XPUSHmortal()

       XPUSHn  Push  a  double  onto  the  stack,  extending the stack if necessary.  Handles 'set' magic.  Uses
               "TARG", so "dTARGET" or "dXSTARG"  should  be  called  to  declare  it.   Do  not  call  multiple
               "TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's - see "mXPUSHn" instead.  See also "PUSHn" and
               "mPUSHn".

                       void    XPUSHn(NV nv)

       XPUSHp  Push  a  string onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.  The "len" indicates the length
               of the string.  Handles 'set' magic.  Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET" or "dXSTARG" should be called  to
               declare  it.   Do  not  call  multiple  "TARG"-oriented  macros to return lists from XSUB's - see
               "mXPUSHp" instead.  See also "PUSHp" and "mPUSHp".

                       void    XPUSHp(char* str, STRLEN len)

       XPUSHs  Push an SV onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.  Does not handle 'set' magic.   Does
               not use "TARG".  See also "XPUSHmortal", "PUSHs" and "PUSHmortal".

                       void    XPUSHs(SV* sv)

       XPUSHu  Push  an unsigned integer onto the stack, extending the stack if necessary.  Handles 'set' magic.
               Uses "TARG", so "dTARGET" or "dXSTARG" should be called to declare  it.   Do  not  call  multiple
               "TARG"-oriented macros to return lists from XSUB's - see "mXPUSHu" instead.  See also "PUSHu" and
               "mPUSHu".

                       void    XPUSHu(UV uv)

       XSRETURN
               Return from XSUB, indicating number of items on the stack.  This is usually handled by "xsubpp".

                       void    XSRETURN(int nitems)

       XSRETURN_EMPTY
               Return an empty list from an XSUB immediately.

                               XSRETURN_EMPTY;

       XSRETURN_IV
               Return an integer from an XSUB immediately.  Uses "XST_mIV".

                       void    XSRETURN_IV(IV iv)

       XSRETURN_NO
               Return &PL_sv_no from an XSUB immediately.  Uses "XST_mNO".

                               XSRETURN_NO;

       XSRETURN_NV
               Return a double from an XSUB immediately.  Uses "XST_mNV".

                       void    XSRETURN_NV(NV nv)

       XSRETURN_PV
               Return a copy of a string from an XSUB immediately.  Uses "XST_mPV".

                       void    XSRETURN_PV(char* str)

       XSRETURN_UNDEF
               Return &PL_sv_undef from an XSUB immediately.  Uses "XST_mUNDEF".

                               XSRETURN_UNDEF;

       XSRETURN_UV
               Return an integer from an XSUB immediately.  Uses "XST_mUV".

                       void    XSRETURN_UV(IV uv)

       XSRETURN_YES
               Return &PL_sv_yes from an XSUB immediately.  Uses "XST_mYES".

                               XSRETURN_YES;

       XST_mIV Place  an  integer  into the specified position "pos" on the stack.  The value is stored in a new
               mortal SV.

                       void    XST_mIV(int pos, IV iv)

       XST_mNO Place &PL_sv_no into the specified position "pos" on the stack.

                       void    XST_mNO(int pos)

       XST_mNV Place a double into the specified position "pos" on the stack.  The value  is  stored  in  a  new
               mortal SV.

                       void    XST_mNV(int pos, NV nv)

       XST_mPV Place  a copy of a string into the specified position "pos" on the stack.  The value is stored in
               a new mortal SV.

                       void    XST_mPV(int pos, char* str)

       XST_mUNDEF
               Place &PL_sv_undef into the specified position "pos" on the stack.

                       void    XST_mUNDEF(int pos)

       XST_mYES
               Place &PL_sv_yes into the specified position "pos" on the stack.

                       void    XST_mYES(int pos)

SV Flags

       svtype  An enum of flags for Perl types.  These are found in the file sv.h in the  "svtype"  enum.   Test
               these flags with the "SvTYPE" macro.

               The types are:

                   SVt_NULL
                   SVt_BIND (unused)
                   SVt_IV
                   SVt_NV
                   SVt_RV
                   SVt_PV
                   SVt_PVIV
                   SVt_PVNV
                   SVt_PVMG
                   SVt_REGEXP
                   SVt_PVGV
                   SVt_PVLV
                   SVt_PVAV
                   SVt_PVHV
                   SVt_PVCV
                   SVt_PVFM
                   SVt_PVIO

               These are most easily explained from the bottom up.

               SVt_PVIO  is for I/O objects, SVt_PVFM for formats, SVt_PVCV for subroutines, SVt_PVHV for hashes
               and SVt_PVAV for arrays.

               All the others are scalar types, that is, things that can be bound to a "$" variable.  For these,
               the internal types are mostly orthogonal to types in the Perl language.

               Hence, checking "SvTYPE(sv) < SVt_PVAV" is the best way to see whether something is a scalar.

               SVt_PVGV represents a typeglob.  If !SvFAKE(sv), then it is a  real,  incoercible  typeglob.   If
               SvFAKE(sv),  then  it  is  a scalar to which a typeglob has been assigned.  Assigning to it again
               will stop it from being a typeglob.  SVt_PVLV represents  a  scalar  that  delegates  to  another
               scalar  behind  the scenes.  It is used, e.g., for the return value of "substr" and for tied hash
               and array elements.  It can hold any scalar  value,  including  a  typeglob.  SVt_REGEXP  is  for
               regular expressions.

               SVt_PVMG  represents  a "normal" scalar (not a typeglob, regular expression, or delegate).  Since
               most scalars do not need all the internal fields of a PVMG, we save memory by allocating  smaller
               structs  when  possible.   All  the  other  types  are just simpler forms of SVt_PVMG, with fewer
               internal fields.
                SVt_NULL can only hold undef.  SVt_IV can hold undef, an integer, or a reference.  (SVt_RV is an
               alias for SVt_IV, which exists for backward compatibility.)  SVt_NV can hold any of  those  or  a
               double.   SVt_PV  can  only hold undef or a string.  SVt_PVIV is a superset of SVt_PV and SVt_IV.
               SVt_PVNV is similar.  SVt_PVMG can hold anything SVt_PVNV can hold, but it can, but does not have
               to, be blessed or magical.

       SVt_IV  Type flag for scalars.  See "svtype".

       SVt_NULL
               Type flag for scalars.  See "svtype".

       SVt_NV  Type flag for scalars.  See "svtype".

       SVt_PV  Type flag for scalars.  See "svtype".

       SVt_PVAV
               Type flag for arrays.  See "svtype".

       SVt_PVCV
               Type flag for subroutines.  See "svtype".

       SVt_PVFM
               Type flag for formats.  See "svtype".

       SVt_PVGV
               Type flag for typeglobs.  See "svtype".

       SVt_PVHV
               Type flag for hashes.  See "svtype".

       SVt_PVIO
               Type flag for I/O objects.  See "svtype".

       SVt_PVIV
               Type flag for scalars.  See "svtype".

       SVt_PVLV
               Type flag for scalars.  See "svtype".

       SVt_PVMG
               Type flag for scalars.  See "svtype".

       SVt_PVNV
               Type flag for scalars.  See "svtype".

       SVt_REGEXP
               Type flag for regular expressions.  See "svtype".

SV Manipulation Functions

       boolSV  Returns a true SV if "b" is a true value, or a false SV if "b" is 0.

               See also "PL_sv_yes" and "PL_sv_no".

                       SV *    boolSV(bool b)

       croak_xs_usage
               A specialised variant of "croak()" for emitting the usage message for xsubs

                   croak_xs_usage(cv, "eee_yow");

               works out the package name and subroutine name from "cv", and then calls "croak()". Hence if "cv"
               is &ouch::awk, it would call "croak" as:

                   Perl_croak(aTHX_ "Usage: %"SVf"::%"SVf"(%s)", "ouch" "awk", "eee_yow");

                       void    croak_xs_usage(const CV *const cv,
                                              const char *const params)

       get_sv  Returns the SV of the specified Perl scalar.  "flags" are passed to "gv_fetchpv". If "GV_ADD"  is
               set  and  the  Perl  variable does not exist then it will be created.  If "flags" is zero and the
               variable does not exist then NULL is returned.

               NOTE: the perl_ form of this function is deprecated.

                       SV*     get_sv(const char *name, I32 flags)

       newRV_inc
               Creates an RV wrapper for an SV.  The reference count for the original SV is incremented.

                       SV*     newRV_inc(SV* sv)

       newSVpadname
               Creates a new SV containing the pad name.  This is currently  identical  to  "newSVsv",  but  pad
               names may cease being SVs at some point, so "newSVpadname" is preferable.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       SV*     newSVpadname(PADNAME *pn)

       newSVpvn_utf8
               Creates  a new SV and copies a string into it.  If utf8 is true, calls "SvUTF8_on" on the new SV.
               Implemented as a wrapper around "newSVpvn_flags".

                       SV*     newSVpvn_utf8(NULLOK const char* s, STRLEN len,
                                             U32 utf8)

       SvCUR   Returns the length of the string which is in the SV.  See "SvLEN".

                       STRLEN  SvCUR(SV* sv)

       SvCUR_set
               Set the current length of the string which is in the SV.  See "SvCUR" and "SvIV_set".

                       void    SvCUR_set(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvEND   Returns a pointer to the spot just after the last character in the string which  is  in  the  SV,
               where  there  is  usually  a trailing null (even though Perl scalars do not strictly require it).
               See "SvCUR".  Access the character as *(SvEND(sv)).

               Warning: If "SvCUR" is equal to "SvLEN", then "SvEND" points to unallocated memory.

                       char*   SvEND(SV* sv)

       SvGAMAGIC
               Returns true if the SV has get magic or overloading.  If either is true then the scalar is active
               data, and has the potential to return a new value every time it is accessed.  Hence you  must  be
               careful  to  only  read it once per user logical operation and work with that returned value.  If
               neither is true then the scalar's value cannot change unless written to.

                       U32     SvGAMAGIC(SV* sv)

       SvGROW  Expands the character buffer in the SV so that it has room for  the  indicated  number  of  bytes
               (remember  to reserve space for an extra trailing NUL character).  Calls "sv_grow" to perform the
               expansion if necessary.  Returns a pointer to the character buffer. SV must be of type >= SVt_PV.
               One alternative is to call "sv_grow" if you are not sure of the type of SV.

                       char *  SvGROW(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvIOK   Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains an integer.

                       U32     SvIOK(SV* sv)

       SvIOKp  Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains an integer.  Checks the  private  setting.
               Use "SvIOK" instead.

                       U32     SvIOKp(SV* sv)

       SvIOK_notUV
               Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV contains a signed integer.

                       bool    SvIOK_notUV(SV* sv)

       SvIOK_off
               Unsets the IV status of an SV.

                       void    SvIOK_off(SV* sv)

       SvIOK_on
               Tells an SV that it is an integer.

                       void    SvIOK_on(SV* sv)

       SvIOK_only
               Tells an SV that it is an integer and disables all other OK bits.

                       void    SvIOK_only(SV* sv)

       SvIOK_only_UV
               Tells an SV that it is an unsigned integer and disables all other OK bits.

                       void    SvIOK_only_UV(SV* sv)

       SvIOK_UV
               Returns  a  boolean  indicating  whether  the  SV contains an integer that must be interpreted as
               unsigned.  A non-negative integer whose value is within the range of both an IV and a UV  may  be
               be flagged as either SvUOK or SVIOK.

                       bool    SvIOK_UV(SV* sv)

       SvIsCOW Returns  a boolean indicating whether the SV is Copy-On-Write (either shared hash key scalars, or
               full Copy On Write scalars if 5.9.0 is configured for COW).

                       bool    SvIsCOW(SV* sv)

       SvIsCOW_shared_hash
               Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV is Copy-On-Write shared hash key scalar.

                       bool    SvIsCOW_shared_hash(SV* sv)

       SvIV    Coerces the given SV to an integer and returns it.  See "SvIVx" for a version which guarantees to
               evaluate sv only once.

                       IV      SvIV(SV* sv)

       SvIVX   Returns the raw value in the SV's IV slot, without checks or conversions.  Only use when you  are
               sure SvIOK is true.  See also "SvIV()".

                       IV      SvIVX(SV* sv)

       SvIVx   Coerces  the given SV to an integer and returns it.  Guarantees to evaluate "sv" only once.  Only
               use this if "sv" is an expression with side effects, otherwise use the more efficient "SvIV".

                       IV      SvIVx(SV* sv)

       SvIV_nomg
               Like "SvIV" but doesn't process magic.

                       IV      SvIV_nomg(SV* sv)

       SvIV_set
               Set the value of the IV pointer in sv to val.  It is possible to perform  the  same  function  of
               this  macro  with  an  lvalue assignment to "SvIVX".  With future Perls, however, it will be more
               efficient to use "SvIV_set" instead of the lvalue assignment to "SvIVX".

                       void    SvIV_set(SV* sv, IV val)

       SvLEN   Returns the size of the string buffer in the SV, not including any part attributable to  "SvOOK".
               See "SvCUR".

                       STRLEN  SvLEN(SV* sv)

       SvLEN_set
               Set the actual length of the string which is in the SV.  See "SvIV_set".

                       void    SvLEN_set(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvMAGIC_set
               Set the value of the MAGIC pointer in sv to val.  See "SvIV_set".

                       void    SvMAGIC_set(SV* sv, MAGIC* val)

       SvNIOK  Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a number, integer or double.

                       U32     SvNIOK(SV* sv)

       SvNIOKp Returns  a  U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a number, integer or double.  Checks the
               private setting.  Use "SvNIOK" instead.

                       U32     SvNIOKp(SV* sv)

       SvNIOK_off
               Unsets the NV/IV status of an SV.

                       void    SvNIOK_off(SV* sv)

       SvNOK   Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a double.

                       U32     SvNOK(SV* sv)

       SvNOKp  Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a double.   Checks  the  private  setting.
               Use "SvNOK" instead.

                       U32     SvNOKp(SV* sv)

       SvNOK_off
               Unsets the NV status of an SV.

                       void    SvNOK_off(SV* sv)

       SvNOK_on
               Tells an SV that it is a double.

                       void    SvNOK_on(SV* sv)

       SvNOK_only
               Tells an SV that it is a double and disables all other OK bits.

                       void    SvNOK_only(SV* sv)

       SvNV    Coerce  the  given  SV  to a double and return it.  See "SvNVx" for a version which guarantees to
               evaluate sv only once.

                       NV      SvNV(SV* sv)

       SvNVX   Returns the raw value in the SV's NV slot, without checks or conversions.  Only use when you  are
               sure SvNOK is true.  See also "SvNV()".

                       NV      SvNVX(SV* sv)

       SvNVx   Coerces  the  given  SV to a double and returns it.  Guarantees to evaluate "sv" only once.  Only
               use this if "sv" is an expression with side effects, otherwise use the more efficient "SvNV".

                       NV      SvNVx(SV* sv)

       SvNV_nomg
               Like "SvNV" but doesn't process magic.

                       NV      SvNV_nomg(SV* sv)

       SvNV_set
               Set the value of the NV pointer in sv to val.  See "SvIV_set".

                       void    SvNV_set(SV* sv, NV val)

       SvOK    Returns a U32 value indicating whether the value is defined. This is only meaningful for scalars.

                       U32     SvOK(SV* sv)

       SvOOK   Returns a U32 indicating whether the pointer to the string buffer is offset.  This hack  is  used
               internally  to  speed up removal of characters from the beginning of a SvPV.  When SvOOK is true,
               then the start of the allocated string buffer is actually "SvOOK_offset()"  bytes  before  SvPVX.
               This offset used to be stored in SvIVX, but is now stored within the spare part of the buffer.

                       U32     SvOOK(SV* sv)

       SvOOK_offset
               Reads  into  len the offset from SvPVX back to the true start of the allocated buffer, which will
               be non-zero if "sv_chop" has been used to efficiently remove characters from start of the buffer.
               Implemented as a macro, which takes  the  address  of  len,  which  must  be  of  type  "STRLEN".
               Evaluates sv more than once.  Sets len to 0 if "SvOOK(sv)" is false.

                       void    SvOOK_offset(NN SV*sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPOK   Returns a U32 value indicating whether the SV contains a character string.

                       U32     SvPOK(SV* sv)

       SvPOKp  Returns  a  U32  value indicating whether the SV contains a character string.  Checks the private
               setting.  Use "SvPOK" instead.

                       U32     SvPOKp(SV* sv)

       SvPOK_off
               Unsets the PV status of an SV.

                       void    SvPOK_off(SV* sv)

       SvPOK_on
               Tells an SV that it is a string.

                       void    SvPOK_on(SV* sv)

       SvPOK_only
               Tells an SV that it is a string and disables all other OK bits.  Will also  turn  off  the  UTF-8
               status.

                       void    SvPOK_only(SV* sv)

       SvPOK_only_UTF8
               Tells an SV that it is a string and disables all other OK bits, and leaves the UTF-8 status as it
               was.

                       void    SvPOK_only_UTF8(SV* sv)

       SvPV    Returns  a  pointer  to  the string in the SV, or a stringified form of the SV if the SV does not
               contain a string.  The SV may cache the stringified  version  becoming  "SvPOK".   Handles  'get'
               magic.  See also "SvPVx" for a version which guarantees to evaluate sv only once.

               Note  that  there  is  no guarantee that the return value of "SvPV()" is equal to "SvPVX(sv)", or
               that "SvPVX(sv)" contains valid data, or that successive calls to "SvPV(sv)) will return the same
               pointer value each time. This is due to the way that things like  overloading  and  Copy-On-Write
               are  handled.   In  these cases, the return value may point to a temporary buffer or similar.  If
               you absolutely need the SvPVX field to be valid (for example, if you intend to write to it), then
               see "SvPV_force"."

                       char*   SvPV(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPVbyte
               Like "SvPV", but converts sv to byte representation first if necessary.

                       char*   SvPVbyte(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPVbytex
               Like "SvPV", but converts sv to byte representation first if necessary.  Guarantees  to  evaluate
               sv only once; use the more efficient "SvPVbyte" otherwise.

                       char*   SvPVbytex(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPVbytex_force
               Like  "SvPV_force",  but  converts  sv  to byte representation first if necessary.  Guarantees to
               evaluate sv only once; use the more efficient "SvPVbyte_force" otherwise.

                       char*   SvPVbytex_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPVbyte_force
               Like "SvPV_force", but converts sv to byte representation first if necessary.

                       char*   SvPVbyte_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPVbyte_nolen
               Like "SvPV_nolen", but converts sv to byte representation first if necessary.

                       char*   SvPVbyte_nolen(SV* sv)

       SvPVutf8
               Like "SvPV", but converts sv to utf8 first if necessary.

                       char*   SvPVutf8(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPVutf8x
               Like "SvPV", but converts sv to utf8 first if necessary.  Guarantees to evaluate  sv  only  once;
               use the more efficient "SvPVutf8" otherwise.

                       char*   SvPVutf8x(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPVutf8x_force
               Like  "SvPV_force",  but  converts sv to utf8 first if necessary.  Guarantees to evaluate sv only
               once; use the more efficient "SvPVutf8_force" otherwise.

                       char*   SvPVutf8x_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPVutf8_force
               Like "SvPV_force", but converts sv to utf8 first if necessary.

                       char*   SvPVutf8_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPVutf8_nolen
               Like "SvPV_nolen", but converts sv to utf8 first if necessary.

                       char*   SvPVutf8_nolen(SV* sv)

       SvPVX   Returns a pointer to the physical string in the SV.  The SV must contain a string. Prior to 5.9.3
               it is not safe to execute this macro unless the SV's type >= SVt_PV.

               This is also used to store the name of an autoloaded subroutine in an XS AUTOLOAD  routine.   See
               "Autoloading with XSUBs" in perlguts.

                       char*   SvPVX(SV* sv)

       SvPVx   A  version  of  "SvPV"  which guarantees to evaluate "sv" only once.  Only use this if "sv" is an
               expression with side effects, otherwise use the more efficient "SvPV".

                       char*   SvPVx(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPV_force
               Like "SvPV" but will force the  SV  into  containing  a  string  ("SvPOK"),  and  only  a  string
               ("SvPOK_only"),  by  hook  or  by  crook.   You need force if you are going to update the "SvPVX"
               directly.  Processes get magic.

               Note that coercing an arbitrary scalar into a plain PV will potentially strip  useful  data  from
               it.  For  example  if  the  SV  was  "SvROK",  then  the  referent  will have its reference count
               decremented, and the SV itself may be converted  to  an  "SvPOK"  scalar  with  a  string  buffer
               containing a value such as "ARRAY(0x1234)".

                       char*   SvPV_force(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPV_force_nomg
               Like "SvPV_force", but doesn't process get magic.

                       char*   SvPV_force_nomg(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPV_nolen
               Like "SvPV" but doesn't set a length variable.

                       char*   SvPV_nolen(SV* sv)

       SvPV_nomg
               Like "SvPV" but doesn't process magic.

                       char*   SvPV_nomg(SV* sv, STRLEN len)

       SvPV_nomg_nolen
               Like "SvPV_nolen" but doesn't process magic.

                       char*   SvPV_nomg_nolen(SV* sv)

       SvPV_set
               Set the value of the PV pointer in sv to val.  See also "SvIV_set".

               Beware  that  the  existing  pointer  may  be  involved in copy-on-write or other mischief, so do
               "SvOOK_off(sv)" and use "sv_force_normal" or "SvPV_force" (or check the SvIsCOW  flag)  first  to
               make sure this modification is safe.

                       void    SvPV_set(SV* sv, char* val)

       SvREFCNT
               Returns the value of the object's reference count.

                       U32     SvREFCNT(SV* sv)

       SvREFCNT_dec
               Decrements the reference count of the given SV. sv may be NULL.

                       void    SvREFCNT_dec(SV* sv)

       SvREFCNT_dec_NN
               Same  as  SvREFCNT_dec,  but can only be used if you know sv is not NULL.  Since we don't have to
               check the NULLness, it's faster and smaller.

                       void    SvREFCNT_dec_NN(SV* sv)

       SvREFCNT_inc
               Increments the reference count of the given SV, returning the SV.

               All of the following SvREFCNT_inc* macros are optimized versions  of  SvREFCNT_inc,  and  can  be
               replaced with SvREFCNT_inc.

                       SV*     SvREFCNT_inc(SV* sv)

       SvREFCNT_inc_NN
               Same  as  SvREFCNT_inc,  but can only be used if you know sv is not NULL.  Since we don't have to
               check the NULLness, it's faster and smaller.

                       SV*     SvREFCNT_inc_NN(SV* sv)

       SvREFCNT_inc_simple
               Same as SvREFCNT_inc, but can only be used with expressions without side effects.  Since we don't
               have to store a temporary value, it's faster.

                       SV*     SvREFCNT_inc_simple(SV* sv)

       SvREFCNT_inc_simple_NN
               Same as SvREFCNT_inc_simple, but can only be used if you know sv is not  NULL.   Since  we  don't
               have to check the NULLness, it's faster and smaller.

                       SV*     SvREFCNT_inc_simple_NN(SV* sv)

       SvREFCNT_inc_simple_void
               Same  as SvREFCNT_inc_simple, but can only be used if you don't need the return value.  The macro
               doesn't need to return a meaningful value.

                       void    SvREFCNT_inc_simple_void(SV* sv)

       SvREFCNT_inc_simple_void_NN
               Same as SvREFCNT_inc, but can only be used if you don't need the return value, and you know  that
               sv  is  not NULL.  The macro doesn't need to return a meaningful value, or check for NULLness, so
               it's smaller and faster.

                       void    SvREFCNT_inc_simple_void_NN(SV* sv)

       SvREFCNT_inc_void
               Same as SvREFCNT_inc, but can only be used if you don't need the return value.  The macro doesn't
               need to return a meaningful value.

                       void    SvREFCNT_inc_void(SV* sv)

       SvREFCNT_inc_void_NN
               Same as SvREFCNT_inc, but can only be used if you don't need the return value, and you know  that
               sv  is  not NULL.  The macro doesn't need to return a meaningful value, or check for NULLness, so
               it's smaller and faster.

                       void    SvREFCNT_inc_void_NN(SV* sv)

       SvROK   Tests if the SV is an RV.

                       U32     SvROK(SV* sv)

       SvROK_off
               Unsets the RV status of an SV.

                       void    SvROK_off(SV* sv)

       SvROK_on
               Tells an SV that it is an RV.

                       void    SvROK_on(SV* sv)

       SvRV    Dereferences an RV to return the SV.

                       SV*     SvRV(SV* sv)

       SvRV_set
               Set the value of the RV pointer in sv to val.  See "SvIV_set".

                       void    SvRV_set(SV* sv, SV* val)

       SvSTASH Returns the stash of the SV.

                       HV*     SvSTASH(SV* sv)

       SvSTASH_set
               Set the value of the STASH pointer in sv to val.  See "SvIV_set".

                       void    SvSTASH_set(SV* sv, HV* val)

       SvTAINT Taints an  SV  if  tainting  is  enabled,  and  if  some  input  to  the  current  expression  is
               tainted--usually  a  variable,  but  possibly  also  implicit  inputs  such  as  locale settings.
               "SvTAINT" propagates that taintedness to the outputs of an expression in a  pessimistic  fashion;
               i.e., without paying attention to precisely which outputs are influenced by which inputs.

                       void    SvTAINT(SV* sv)

       SvTAINTED
               Checks to see if an SV is tainted.  Returns TRUE if it is, FALSE if not.

                       bool    SvTAINTED(SV* sv)

       SvTAINTED_off
               Untaints  an  SV.   Be  very  careful  with  this  routine,  as  it short-circuits some of Perl's
               fundamental security features.  XS module authors should not use this function unless they  fully
               understand  all  the  implications  of unconditionally untainting the value. Untainting should be
               done in the standard  perl  fashion,  via  a  carefully  crafted  regexp,  rather  than  directly
               untainting variables.

                       void    SvTAINTED_off(SV* sv)

       SvTAINTED_on
               Marks an SV as tainted if tainting is enabled.

                       void    SvTAINTED_on(SV* sv)

       SvTRUE  Returns a boolean indicating whether Perl would evaluate the SV as true or false.  See SvOK() for
               a defined/undefined test.  Handles 'get' magic unless the scalar is already SvPOK, SvIOK or SvNOK
               (the public, not the private flags).

                       bool    SvTRUE(SV* sv)

       SvTRUE_nomg
               Returns a boolean indicating whether Perl would evaluate the SV as true or false.  See SvOK() for
               a defined/undefined test.  Does not handle 'get' magic.

                       bool    SvTRUE_nomg(SV* sv)

       SvTYPE  Returns the type of the SV.  See "svtype".

                       svtype  SvTYPE(SV* sv)

       SvUOK   Returns  a  boolean  indicating  whether  the  SV contains an integer that must be interpreted as
               unsigned.  A non-negative integer whose value is within the range of both an IV and a UV  may  be
               be flagged as either SvUOK or SVIOK.

                       bool    SvUOK(SV* sv)

       SvUPGRADE
               Used  to  upgrade  an  SV  to  a  more complex form.  Uses "sv_upgrade" to perform the upgrade if
               necessary.  See "svtype".

                       void    SvUPGRADE(SV* sv, svtype type)

       SvUTF8  Returns a U32 value indicating the UTF-8 status of an SV.  If things are  set-up  properly,  this
               indicates whether or not the SV contains UTF-8 encoded data.  You should use this after a call to
               SvPV() or one of its variants, in case any call to string overloading updates the internal flag.

                       U32     SvUTF8(SV* sv)

       SvUTF8_off
               Unsets  the  UTF-8  status  of  an  SV  (the  data  is  not  changed, just the flag).  Do not use
               frivolously.

                       void    SvUTF8_off(SV *sv)

       SvUTF8_on
               Turn on the UTF-8 status of an SV (the  data  is  not  changed,  just  the  flag).   Do  not  use
               frivolously.

                       void    SvUTF8_on(SV *sv)

       SvUV    Coerces  the  given  SV  to  an unsigned integer and returns it.  See "SvUVx" for a version which
               guarantees to evaluate sv only once.

                       UV      SvUV(SV* sv)

       SvUVX   Returns the raw value in the SV's UV slot, without checks or conversions.  Only use when you  are
               sure SvIOK is true.  See also "SvUV()".

                       UV      SvUVX(SV* sv)

       SvUVx   Coerces  the  given  SV  to an unsigned integer and returns it.  Guarantees to evaluate "sv" only
               once.  Only use this if "sv" is an expression with side effects, otherwise use the more efficient
               "SvUV".

                       UV      SvUVx(SV* sv)

       SvUV_nomg
               Like "SvUV" but doesn't process magic.

                       UV      SvUV_nomg(SV* sv)

       SvUV_set
               Set the value of the UV pointer in sv to val.  See "SvIV_set".

                       void    SvUV_set(SV* sv, UV val)

       SvVOK   Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV contains a v-string.

                       bool    SvVOK(SV* sv)

       sv_catpvn_nomg
               Like "sv_catpvn" but doesn't process magic.

                       void    sv_catpvn_nomg(SV* sv, const char* ptr,
                                              STRLEN len)

       sv_catpv_nomg
               Like "sv_catpv" but doesn't process magic.

                       void    sv_catpv_nomg(SV* sv, const char* ptr)

       sv_catsv_nomg
               Like "sv_catsv" but doesn't process magic.

                       void    sv_catsv_nomg(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)

       sv_derived_from
               Exactly like "sv_derived_from_pv", but doesn't take a "flags" parameter.

                       bool    sv_derived_from(SV* sv, const char *const name)

       sv_derived_from_pv
               Exactly like "sv_derived_from_pvn", but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a  string/length
               pair.

                       bool    sv_derived_from_pv(SV* sv,
                                                  const char *const name,
                                                  U32 flags)

       sv_derived_from_pvn
               Returns  a  boolean indicating whether the SV is derived from the specified class at the C level.
               To check derivation at the Perl level, call "isa()" as a normal Perl method.

               Currently, the only significant value for "flags" is SVf_UTF8.

                       bool    sv_derived_from_pvn(SV* sv,
                                                   const char *const name,
                                                   const STRLEN len, U32 flags)

       sv_derived_from_sv
               Exactly like "sv_derived_from_pvn", but takes the name string in the form of an SV instead  of  a
               string/length pair.

                       bool    sv_derived_from_sv(SV* sv, SV *namesv,
                                                  U32 flags)

       sv_does Like "sv_does_pv", but doesn't take a "flags" parameter.

                       bool    sv_does(SV* sv, const char *const name)

       sv_does_pv
               Like "sv_does_sv", but takes a nul-terminated string instead of an SV.

                       bool    sv_does_pv(SV* sv, const char *const name,
                                          U32 flags)

       sv_does_pvn
               Like "sv_does_sv", but takes a string/length pair instead of an SV.

                       bool    sv_does_pvn(SV* sv, const char *const name,
                                           const STRLEN len, U32 flags)

       sv_does_sv
               Returns  a  boolean  indicating  whether the SV performs a specific, named role.  The SV can be a
               Perl object or the name of a Perl class.

                       bool    sv_does_sv(SV* sv, SV* namesv, U32 flags)

       sv_report_used
               Dump the contents of all SVs not yet freed (debugging aid).

                       void    sv_report_used()

       sv_setsv_nomg
               Like "sv_setsv" but doesn't process magic.

                       void    sv_setsv_nomg(SV* dsv, SV* ssv)

       sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg
               Like sv_utf8_upgrade, but doesn't do magic on "sv".

                       STRLEN  sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg(NN SV *sv)

SV-Body Allocation

       looks_like_number
               Test if the content of an SV looks like a number (or is a  number).   "Inf"  and  "Infinity"  are
               treated  as  numbers  (so will not issue a non-numeric warning), even if your atof() doesn't grok
               them.  Get-magic is ignored.

                       I32     looks_like_number(SV *const sv)

       newRV_noinc
               Creates an RV wrapper for an SV.  The reference count for the original SV is not incremented.

                       SV*     newRV_noinc(SV *const sv)

       newSV   Creates a new SV.  A non-zero "len" parameter indicates  the  number  of  bytes  of  preallocated
               string  space  the SV should have.  An extra byte for a trailing NUL is also reserved.  (SvPOK is
               not set for the SV even if string space is allocated.)  The reference count for the new SV is set
               to 1.

               In 5.9.3, newSV() replaces the older NEWSV() API, and drops the first parameter, x, a  debug  aid
               which  allowed  callers  to  identify  themselves.   This  aid has been superseded by a new build
               option, PERL_MEM_LOG (see "PERL_MEM_LOG" in perlhacktips).  The older API is still there for  use
               in XS modules supporting older perls.

                       SV*     newSV(const STRLEN len)

       newSVhek
               Creates  a new SV from the hash key structure.  It will generate scalars that point to the shared
               string table where possible.  Returns a new (undefined) SV if the hek is NULL.

                       SV*     newSVhek(const HEK *const hek)

       newSViv Creates a new SV and copies an integer into it.  The reference count for the SV is set to 1.

                       SV*     newSViv(const IV i)

       newSVnv Creates a new SV and copies a floating point value into it.  The reference count for  the  SV  is
               set to 1.

                       SV*     newSVnv(const NV n)

       newSVpv Creates  a  new  SV and copies a string into it.  The reference count for the SV is set to 1.  If
               "len" is zero, Perl will compute the length  using  strlen().   For  efficiency,  consider  using
               "newSVpvn" instead.

                       SV*     newSVpv(const char *const s, const STRLEN len)

       newSVpvf
               Creates a new SV and initializes it with the string formatted like "sprintf".

                       SV*     newSVpvf(const char *const pat, ...)

       newSVpvn
               Creates  a  new SV and copies a buffer into it, which may contain NUL characters ("\0") and other
               binary data.  The reference count for the SV is set to 1.  Note that if "len" is zero, Perl  will
               create  a  zero length (Perl) string.  You are responsible for ensuring that the source buffer is
               at least "len" bytes long.  If the "buffer" argument is NULL the new SV will be undefined.

                       SV*     newSVpvn(const char *const s, const STRLEN len)

       newSVpvn_flags
               Creates a new SV and copies a string into it.  The reference count for the SV is set to 1.   Note
               that  if  "len" is zero, Perl will create a zero length string.  You are responsible for ensuring
               that the source string is at least "len" bytes long.  If the "s" argument is NULL the new SV will
               be undefined.  Currently  the  only  flag  bits  accepted  are  "SVf_UTF8"  and  "SVs_TEMP".   If
               "SVs_TEMP"  is  set, then "sv_2mortal()" is called on the result before returning.  If "SVf_UTF8"
               is set, "s" is considered to be in UTF-8 and the "SVf_UTF8" flag will  be  set  on  the  new  SV.
               "newSVpvn_utf8()" is a convenience wrapper for this function, defined as

                   #define newSVpvn_utf8(s, len, u)                    \
                       newSVpvn_flags((s), (len), (u) ? SVf_UTF8 : 0)

                       SV*     newSVpvn_flags(const char *const s,
                                              const STRLEN len,
                                              const U32 flags)

       newSVpvn_share
               Creates  a  new  SV with its SvPVX_const pointing to a shared string in the string table.  If the
               string does not already exist in the table, it is created first.  Turns on the SvIsCOW  flag  (or
               READONLY and FAKE in 5.16 and earlier).  If the "hash" parameter is non-zero, that value is used;
               otherwise  the  hash  is computed.  The string's hash can later be retrieved from the SV with the
               "SvSHARED_HASH()" macro.  The idea here is that as the string table is used for shared hash  keys
               these strings will have SvPVX_const == HeKEY and hash lookup will avoid string compare.

                       SV*     newSVpvn_share(const char* s, I32 len, U32 hash)

       newSVpvs
               Like "newSVpvn", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       SV*     newSVpvs(const char* s)

       newSVpvs_flags
               Like "newSVpvn_flags", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       SV*     newSVpvs_flags(const char* s, U32 flags)

       newSVpvs_share
               Like  "newSVpvn_share",  but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair and omits the
               hash parameter.

                       SV*     newSVpvs_share(const char* s)

       newSVpv_share
               Like "newSVpvn_share", but takes a nul-terminated string instead of a string/length pair.

                       SV*     newSVpv_share(const char* s, U32 hash)

       newSVrv Creates a new SV for the existing RV, "rv", to point to.  If "rv" is not an RV then  it  will  be
               upgraded  to  one.   If  "classname" is non-null then the new SV will be blessed in the specified
               package.  The new SV is returned and its reference count is 1. The reference count 1 is owned  by
               "rv".

                       SV*     newSVrv(SV *const rv,
                                       const char *const classname)

       newSVsv Creates a new SV which is an exact duplicate of the original SV.  (Uses "sv_setsv".)

                       SV*     newSVsv(SV *const old)

       newSVuv Creates  a  new SV and copies an unsigned integer into it.  The reference count for the SV is set
               to 1.

                       SV*     newSVuv(const UV u)

       newSV_type
               Creates a new SV, of the type specified.  The reference count for the new SV is set to 1.

                       SV*     newSV_type(const svtype type)

       sv_2bool
               This macro is only used by sv_true() or its macro equivalent, and only if the  latter's  argument
               is neither SvPOK, SvIOK nor SvNOK.  It calls sv_2bool_flags with the SV_GMAGIC flag.

                       bool    sv_2bool(SV *const sv)

       sv_2bool_flags
               This  function  is  only  used  by  sv_true()  and friends,  and only if the latter's argument is
               neither SvPOK, SvIOK nor SvNOK.  If the flags contain SV_GMAGIC, then it does an mg_get() first.

                       bool    sv_2bool_flags(SV *const sv, const I32 flags)

       sv_2cv  Using various gambits, try to get a CV from an SV; in addition, try if possible to  set  *st  and
               *gvp to the stash and GV associated with it.  The flags in "lref" are passed to gv_fetchsv.

                       CV*     sv_2cv(SV* sv, HV **const st, GV **const gvp,
                                      const I32 lref)

       sv_2io  Using  various  gambits,  try  to get an IO from an SV: the IO slot if its a GV; or the recursive
               result if we're an RV; or the IO slot of the symbol named after the PV if we're a string.

               'Get' magic is ignored on the sv passed in, but will be called on "SvRV(sv)" if sv is an RV.

                       IO*     sv_2io(SV *const sv)

       sv_2iv_flags
               Return the integer value of an SV, doing any necessary  string  conversion.   If  flags  includes
               SV_GMAGIC, does an mg_get() first.  Normally used via the "SvIV(sv)" and "SvIVx(sv)" macros.

                       IV      sv_2iv_flags(SV *const sv, const I32 flags)

       sv_2mortal
               Marks  an  existing SV as mortal.  The SV will be destroyed "soon", either by an explicit call to
               FREETMPS, or by an implicit call at places such as statement boundaries.  SvTEMP() is  turned  on
               which  means  that  the  SV's  string  buffer  can  be  "stolen"  if this SV is copied.  See also
               "sv_newmortal" and "sv_mortalcopy".

                       SV*     sv_2mortal(SV *const sv)

       sv_2nv_flags
               Return the num value of an SV, doing any  necessary  string  or  integer  conversion.   If  flags
               includes  SV_GMAGIC,  does  an  mg_get() first.  Normally used via the "SvNV(sv)" and "SvNVx(sv)"
               macros.

                       NV      sv_2nv_flags(SV *const sv, const I32 flags)

       sv_2pvbyte
               Return a pointer to the byte-encoded representation of the SV, and set *lp to  its  length.   May
               cause the SV to be downgraded from UTF-8 as a side-effect.

               Usually accessed via the "SvPVbyte" macro.

                       char*   sv_2pvbyte(SV *sv, STRLEN *const lp)

       sv_2pvutf8
               Return  a  pointer to the UTF-8-encoded representation of the SV, and set *lp to its length.  May
               cause the SV to be upgraded to UTF-8 as a side-effect.

               Usually accessed via the "SvPVutf8" macro.

                       char*   sv_2pvutf8(SV *sv, STRLEN *const lp)

       sv_2pv_flags
               Returns a pointer to the string value of an SV, and sets *lp to its length.   If  flags  includes
               SV_GMAGIC,  does  an  mg_get() first.  Coerces sv to a string if necessary.  Normally invoked via
               the "SvPV_flags" macro.  "sv_2pv()" and "sv_2pv_nomg" usually end up here too.

                       char*   sv_2pv_flags(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const lp,
                                            const I32 flags)

       sv_2uv_flags
               Return the unsigned integer value of an SV, doing any  necessary  string  conversion.   If  flags
               includes  SV_GMAGIC,  does  an  mg_get() first.  Normally used via the "SvUV(sv)" and "SvUVx(sv)"
               macros.

                       UV      sv_2uv_flags(SV *const sv, const I32 flags)

       sv_backoff
               Remove any string offset.  You should normally use the "SvOOK_off" macro wrapper instead.

                       int     sv_backoff(SV *const sv)

       sv_bless
               Blesses an SV into a specified package.  The SV must be an RV.  The package must be designated by
               its stash (see "gv_stashpv()").  The reference count of the SV is unaffected.

                       SV*     sv_bless(SV *const sv, HV *const stash)

       sv_catpv
               Concatenates the string onto the end of the string which is in the SV.  If the SV has  the  UTF-8
               status  set,  then  the bytes appended should be valid UTF-8.  Handles 'get' magic, but not 'set'
               magic.  See "sv_catpv_mg".

                       void    sv_catpv(SV *const sv, const char* ptr)

       sv_catpvf
               Processes its arguments like "sprintf" and appends  the  formatted  output  to  an  SV.   If  the
               appended  data  contains  "wide"  characters  (including, but not limited to, SVs with a UTF-8 PV
               formatted with %s, and characters >255 formatted with %c), the original SV might get upgraded  to
               UTF-8.   Handles  'get'  magic, but not 'set' magic.  See "sv_catpvf_mg".  If the original SV was
               UTF-8, the pattern should be valid UTF-8; if the original SV was bytes,  the  pattern  should  be
               too.

                       void    sv_catpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
                                         ...)

       sv_catpvf_mg
               Like "sv_catpvf", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_catpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
                                            const char *const pat, ...)

       sv_catpvn
               Concatenates  the  string  onto  the  end  of the string which is in the SV.  The "len" indicates
               number of bytes to copy.  If the SV has the UTF-8 status set, then the bytes appended  should  be
               valid UTF-8.  Handles 'get' magic, but not 'set' magic.  See "sv_catpvn_mg".

                       void    sv_catpvn(SV *dsv, const char *sstr, STRLEN len)

       sv_catpvn_flags
               Concatenates  the  string  onto  the  end  of the string which is in the SV.  The "len" indicates
               number of bytes to copy.  If the SV has the UTF-8 status set, then the bytes appended  should  be
               valid  UTF-8.   If  "flags"  has  the  "SV_SMAGIC"  bit set, will "mg_set" on "dsv" afterwards if
               appropriate.  "sv_catpvn" and "sv_catpvn_nomg" are implemented in terms of this function.

                       void    sv_catpvn_flags(SV *const dstr,
                                               const char *sstr,
                                               const STRLEN len,
                                               const I32 flags)

       sv_catpvs
               Like "sv_catpvn", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       void    sv_catpvs(SV* sv, const char* s)

       sv_catpvs_flags
               Like "sv_catpvn_flags", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       void    sv_catpvs_flags(SV* sv, const char* s,
                                               I32 flags)

       sv_catpvs_mg
               Like "sv_catpvn_mg", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       void    sv_catpvs_mg(SV* sv, const char* s)

       sv_catpvs_nomg
               Like "sv_catpvn_nomg", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       void    sv_catpvs_nomg(SV* sv, const char* s)

       sv_catpv_flags
               Concatenates the string onto the end of the string which is in the SV.  If the SV has  the  UTF-8
               status  set,  then  the bytes appended should be valid UTF-8.  If "flags" has the "SV_SMAGIC" bit
               set, will "mg_set" on the modified SV if appropriate.

                       void    sv_catpv_flags(SV *dstr, const char *sstr,
                                              const I32 flags)

       sv_catpv_mg
               Like "sv_catpv", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_catpv_mg(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)

       sv_catsv
               Concatenates the string from SV "ssv" onto the end of the string in SV "dsv".  If "ssv" is  null,
               does  nothing;  otherwise  modifies  only  "dsv".   Handles 'get' magic on both SVs, but no 'set'
               magic.  See "sv_catsv_mg" and "sv_catsv_nomg".

                       void    sv_catsv(SV *dstr, SV *sstr)

       sv_catsv_flags
               Concatenates the string from SV "ssv" onto the end of the string in SV "dsv".  If "ssv" is  null,
               does  nothing;  otherwise modifies only "dsv".  If "flags" include "SV_GMAGIC" bit set, will call
               "mg_get" on both SVs if appropriate.  If "flags" include "SV_SMAGIC", "mg_set" will be called  on
               the  modified  SV  afterward, if appropriate.  "sv_catsv", "sv_catsv_nomg", and "sv_catsv_mg" are
               implemented in terms of this function.

                       void    sv_catsv_flags(SV *const dsv, SV *const ssv,
                                              const I32 flags)

       sv_chop Efficient removal of characters from the beginning of the string buffer.  SvPOK(sv), or at  least
               SvPOKp(sv),  must  be true and the "ptr" must be a pointer to somewhere inside the string buffer.
               The "ptr" becomes the first character of the adjusted string.  Uses the "OOK hack".   On  return,
               only SvPOK(sv) and SvPOKp(sv) among the OK flags will be true.

               Beware:  after  this  function returns, "ptr" and SvPVX_const(sv) may no longer refer to the same
               chunk of data.

               The unfortunate similarity of this function's name to that of Perl's "chop" operator is  strictly
               coincidental.  This function works from the left; "chop" works from the right.

                       void    sv_chop(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)

       sv_clear
               Clear an SV: call any destructors, free up any memory used by the body, and free the body itself.
               The SV's head is not freed, although its type is set to all 1's so that it won't inadvertently be
               assumed  to  be  live  during  global  destruction etc.  This function should only be called when
               REFCNT is zero.  Most of the  time  you'll  want  to  call  "sv_free()"  (or  its  macro  wrapper
               "SvREFCNT_dec") instead.

                       void    sv_clear(SV *const orig_sv)

       sv_cmp  Compares  the  strings in two SVs.  Returns -1, 0, or 1 indicating whether the string in "sv1" is
               less than, equal to, or greater than the string in  "sv2".   Is  UTF-8  and  'use  bytes'  aware,
               handles get magic, and will coerce its args to strings if necessary.  See also "sv_cmp_locale".

                       I32     sv_cmp(SV *const sv1, SV *const sv2)

       sv_cmp_flags
               Compares  the  strings in two SVs.  Returns -1, 0, or 1 indicating whether the string in "sv1" is
               less than, equal to, or greater than the string in "sv2".  Is UTF-8 and  'use  bytes'  aware  and
               will  coerce  its  args  to strings if necessary.  If the flags include SV_GMAGIC, it handles get
               magic.  See also "sv_cmp_locale_flags".

                       I32     sv_cmp_flags(SV *const sv1, SV *const sv2,
                                            const U32 flags)

       sv_cmp_locale
               Compares the strings in two SVs in a locale-aware  manner.   Is  UTF-8  and  'use  bytes'  aware,
               handles get magic, and will coerce its args to strings if necessary.  See also "sv_cmp".

                       I32     sv_cmp_locale(SV *const sv1, SV *const sv2)

       sv_cmp_locale_flags
               Compares  the  strings  in  two SVs in a locale-aware manner.  Is UTF-8 and 'use bytes' aware and
               will coerce its args to strings if necessary.  If the flags contain  SV_GMAGIC,  it  handles  get
               magic.  See also "sv_cmp_flags".

                       I32     sv_cmp_locale_flags(SV *const sv1,
                                                   SV *const sv2,
                                                   const U32 flags)

       sv_collxfrm
               This calls "sv_collxfrm_flags" with the SV_GMAGIC flag.  See "sv_collxfrm_flags".

                       char*   sv_collxfrm(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const nxp)

       sv_collxfrm_flags
               Add  Collate  Transform  magic  to  an  SV  if  it doesn't already have it.  If the flags contain
               SV_GMAGIC, it handles get-magic.

               Any scalar variable may carry PERL_MAGIC_collxfrm magic that contains  the  scalar  data  of  the
               variable, but transformed to such a format that a normal memory comparison can be used to compare
               the data according to the locale settings.

                       char*   sv_collxfrm_flags(SV *const sv,
                                                 STRLEN *const nxp,
                                                 I32 const flags)

       sv_copypv_flags
               Implementation of sv_copypv and sv_copypv_nomg.  Calls get magic iff flags include SV_GMAGIC.

                       void    sv_copypv_flags(SV *const dsv, SV *const ssv,
                                               const I32 flags)

       sv_copypv_nomg
               Like sv_copypv, but doesn't invoke get magic first.

                       void    sv_copypv_nomg(SV *const dsv, SV *const ssv)

       sv_dec  Auto-decrement  of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric conversion if necessary.  Handles
               'get' magic and operator overloading.

                       void    sv_dec(SV *const sv)

       sv_dec_nomg
               Auto-decrement of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric conversion if necessary.   Handles
               operator overloading.  Skips handling 'get' magic.

                       void    sv_dec_nomg(SV *const sv)

       sv_eq   Returns a boolean indicating whether the strings in the two SVs are identical.  Is UTF-8 and 'use
               bytes' aware, handles get magic, and will coerce its args to strings if necessary.

                       I32     sv_eq(SV* sv1, SV* sv2)

       sv_eq_flags
               Returns a boolean indicating whether the strings in the two SVs are identical.  Is UTF-8 and 'use
               bytes'  aware  and  coerces its args to strings if necessary.  If the flags include SV_GMAGIC, it
               handles get-magic, too.

                       I32     sv_eq_flags(SV* sv1, SV* sv2, const U32 flags)

       sv_force_normal_flags
               Undo various types of fakery on an SV, where fakery means "more than" a string: if the  PV  is  a
               shared string, make a private copy; if we're a ref, stop refing; if we're a glob, downgrade to an
               xpvmg;  if  we're  a  copy-on-write scalar, this is the on-write time when we do the copy, and is
               also used locally; if this is a vstring, drop the vstring magic.  If "SV_COW_DROP_PV" is set then
               a copy-on-write scalar drops its PV buffer (if any) and becomes SvPOK_off rather  than  making  a
               copy.  (Used where this scalar is about to be set to some other value.)  In addition, the "flags"
               parameter  gets  passed  to  "sv_unref_flags()"  when  unreffing.   "sv_force_normal"  calls this
               function with flags set to 0.

                       void    sv_force_normal_flags(SV *const sv,
                                                     const U32 flags)

       sv_free Decrement an SV's reference count, and if it drops to zero, call "sv_clear" to invoke destructors
               and free up any memory used by the body; finally, deallocate  the  SV's  head  itself.   Normally
               called via a wrapper macro "SvREFCNT_dec".

                       void    sv_free(SV *const sv)

       sv_gets Get  a  line from the filehandle and store it into the SV, optionally appending to the currently-
               stored string. If "append" is not 0, the line is appended to the SV instead  of  overwriting  it.
               "append"  should  be  set  to  the byte offset that the appended string should start at in the SV
               (typically, "SvCUR(sv)" is a suitable choice).

                       char*   sv_gets(SV *const sv, PerlIO *const fp,
                                       I32 append)

       sv_grow Expands the character buffer in the SV.  If necessary, uses "sv_unref" and  upgrades  the  SV  to
               "SVt_PV".  Returns a pointer to the character buffer.  Use the "SvGROW" wrapper instead.

                       char*   sv_grow(SV *const sv, STRLEN newlen)

       sv_inc  Auto-increment  of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric conversion if necessary.  Handles
               'get' magic and operator overloading.

                       void    sv_inc(SV *const sv)

       sv_inc_nomg
               Auto-increment of the value in the SV, doing string to numeric conversion if necessary.   Handles
               operator overloading.  Skips handling 'get' magic.

                       void    sv_inc_nomg(SV *const sv)

       sv_insert
               Inserts  a  string  at  the  specified offset/length within the SV.  Similar to the Perl substr()
               function.  Handles get magic.

                       void    sv_insert(SV *const bigstr, const STRLEN offset,
                                         const STRLEN len,
                                         const char *const little,
                                         const STRLEN littlelen)

       sv_insert_flags
               Same as "sv_insert", but the extra "flags" are passed to the "SvPV_force_flags" that  applies  to
               "bigstr".

                       void    sv_insert_flags(SV *const bigstr,
                                               const STRLEN offset,
                                               const STRLEN len,
                                               const char *const little,
                                               const STRLEN littlelen,
                                               const U32 flags)

       sv_isa  Returns  a  boolean indicating whether the SV is blessed into the specified class.  This does not
               check for subtypes; use "sv_derived_from" to verify an inheritance relationship.

                       int     sv_isa(SV* sv, const char *const name)

       sv_isobject
               Returns a boolean indicating whether the SV is an RV pointing to a blessed object.  If the SV  is
               not an RV, or if the object is not blessed, then this will return false.

                       int     sv_isobject(SV* sv)

       sv_len  Returns  the  length  of the string in the SV.  Handles magic and type coercion and sets the UTF8
               flag appropriately.  See also "SvCUR", which gives raw access to the xpv_cur slot.

                       STRLEN  sv_len(SV *const sv)

       sv_len_utf8
               Returns the number of characters in the string in an SV, counting wide UTF-8 bytes  as  a  single
               character.  Handles magic and type coercion.

                       STRLEN  sv_len_utf8(SV *const sv)

       sv_magic
               Adds  magic to an SV.  First upgrades "sv" to type "SVt_PVMG" if necessary, then adds a new magic
               item of type "how" to the head of the magic list.

               See "sv_magicext" (which "sv_magic" now calls) for a description of the handling  of  the  "name"
               and "namlen" arguments.

               You  need  to  use  "sv_magicext"  to  add  magic to SvREADONLY SVs and also to add more than one
               instance of the same 'how'.

                       void    sv_magic(SV *const sv, SV *const obj,
                                        const int how, const char *const name,
                                        const I32 namlen)

       sv_magicext
               Adds magic to an SV, upgrading it if necessary.   Applies  the  supplied  vtable  and  returns  a
               pointer to the magic added.

               Note  that  "sv_magicext" will allow things that "sv_magic" will not.  In particular, you can add
               magic to SvREADONLY SVs, and add more than one instance of the same 'how'.

               If "namlen" is greater than zero then a "savepvn" copy of "name" is stored, if "namlen"  is  zero
               then  "name"  is  stored as-is and - as another special case - if "(name && namlen == HEf_SVKEY)"
               then "name" is assumed to contain an "SV*" and is stored as-is with its REFCNT incremented.

               (This is now used as a subroutine by "sv_magic".)

                       MAGIC * sv_magicext(SV *const sv, SV *const obj,
                                           const int how,
                                           const MGVTBL *const vtbl,
                                           const char *const name,
                                           const I32 namlen)

       sv_mortalcopy
               Creates a new SV which is a copy of the original SV (using "sv_setsv").  The new SV is marked  as
               mortal.   It  will be destroyed "soon", either by an explicit call to FREETMPS, or by an implicit
               call at places such as statement boundaries.  See also "sv_newmortal" and "sv_2mortal".

                       SV*     sv_mortalcopy(SV *const oldsv)

       sv_newmortal
               Creates a new null SV which is mortal.  The reference count of the SV is set to 1.   It  will  be
               destroyed  "soon",  either by an explicit call to FREETMPS, or by an implicit call at places such
               as statement boundaries.  See also "sv_mortalcopy" and "sv_2mortal".

                       SV*     sv_newmortal()

       sv_newref
               Increment an SV's reference count.  Use the "SvREFCNT_inc()" wrapper instead.

                       SV*     sv_newref(SV *const sv)

       sv_pos_b2u
               Converts the value pointed to by offsetp from a count of bytes from the start of the string, to a
               count of the equivalent number of UTF-8 chars.  Handles magic and type coercion.

                       void    sv_pos_b2u(SV *const sv, I32 *const offsetp)

       sv_pos_u2b
               Converts the value pointed to by offsetp from a count of  UTF-8  chars  from  the  start  of  the
               string,  to  a  count of the equivalent number of bytes; if lenp is non-zero, it does the same to
               lenp, but this time starting from the offset, rather than from the start of the string.   Handles
               magic and type coercion.

               Use "sv_pos_u2b_flags" in preference, which correctly handles strings longer than 2Gb.

                       void    sv_pos_u2b(SV *const sv, I32 *const offsetp,
                                          I32 *const lenp)

       sv_pos_u2b_flags
               Converts  the  value  pointed  to  by  offsetp  from a count of UTF-8 chars from the start of the
               string, to a count of the equivalent number of bytes; if lenp is non-zero, it does  the  same  to
               lenp,  but this time starting from the offset, rather than from the start of the string.  Handles
               type   coercion.    flags   is    passed    to    "SvPV_flags",    and    usually    should    be
               "SV_GMAGIC|SV_CONST_RETURN" to handle magic.

                       STRLEN  sv_pos_u2b_flags(SV *const sv, STRLEN uoffset,
                                                STRLEN *const lenp, U32 flags)

       sv_pvbyten_force
               The backend for the "SvPVbytex_force" macro.  Always use the macro instead.

                       char*   sv_pvbyten_force(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const lp)

       sv_pvn_force
               Get  a sensible string out of the SV somehow.  A private implementation of the "SvPV_force" macro
               for compilers which can't cope with complex macro expressions.  Always use the macro instead.

                       char*   sv_pvn_force(SV* sv, STRLEN* lp)

       sv_pvn_force_flags
               Get a sensible string out of the SV somehow.  If "flags" has "SV_GMAGIC" bit set,  will  "mg_get"
               on  "sv"  if  appropriate,  else  not.  "sv_pvn_force" and "sv_pvn_force_nomg" are implemented in
               terms of this function.  You normally want  to  use  the  various  wrapper  macros  instead:  see
               "SvPV_force" and "SvPV_force_nomg"

                       char*   sv_pvn_force_flags(SV *const sv,
                                                  STRLEN *const lp,
                                                  const I32 flags)

       sv_pvutf8n_force
               The backend for the "SvPVutf8x_force" macro.  Always use the macro instead.

                       char*   sv_pvutf8n_force(SV *const sv, STRLEN *const lp)

       sv_reftype
               Returns a string describing what the SV is a reference to.

                       const char* sv_reftype(const SV *const sv, const int ob)

       sv_replace
               Make the first argument a copy of the second, then delete the original.  The target SV physically
               takes  over  ownership  of  the body of the source SV and inherits its flags; however, the target
               keeps any magic it owns, and any magic in the source is discarded.  Note that this  is  a  rather
               specialist  SV  copying  operation;  most of the time you'll want to use "sv_setsv" or one of its
               many macro front-ends.

                       void    sv_replace(SV *const sv, SV *const nsv)

       sv_reset
               Underlying implementation for the "reset" Perl function.  Note that the  perl-level  function  is
               vaguely deprecated.

                       void    sv_reset(const char* s, HV *const stash)

       sv_rvweaken
               Weaken   a   reference:   set   the  "SvWEAKREF"  flag  on  this  RV;  give  the  referred-to  SV
               "PERL_MAGIC_backref" magic if it hasn't already; and push a back-reference to this  RV  onto  the
               array  of  backreferences  associated  with  that magic.  If the RV is magical, set magic will be
               called after the RV is cleared.

                       SV*     sv_rvweaken(SV *const sv)

       sv_setiv
               Copies an integer into the given SV, upgrading first if necessary.  Does not handle 'set'  magic.
               See also "sv_setiv_mg".

                       void    sv_setiv(SV *const sv, const IV num)

       sv_setiv_mg
               Like "sv_setiv", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_setiv_mg(SV *const sv, const IV i)

       sv_setnv
               Copies  a  double  into the given SV, upgrading first if necessary.  Does not handle 'set' magic.
               See also "sv_setnv_mg".

                       void    sv_setnv(SV *const sv, const NV num)

       sv_setnv_mg
               Like "sv_setnv", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_setnv_mg(SV *const sv, const NV num)

       sv_setpv
               Copies a string into an SV.  The string must be null-terminated.  Does not  handle  'set'  magic.
               See "sv_setpv_mg".

                       void    sv_setpv(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)

       sv_setpvf
               Works  like "sv_catpvf" but copies the text into the SV instead of appending it.  Does not handle
               'set' magic.  See "sv_setpvf_mg".

                       void    sv_setpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
                                         ...)

       sv_setpvf_mg
               Like "sv_setpvf", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_setpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
                                            const char *const pat, ...)

       sv_setpviv
               Copies an integer into the given SV, also updating its  string  value.   Does  not  handle  'set'
               magic.  See "sv_setpviv_mg".

                       void    sv_setpviv(SV *const sv, const IV num)

       sv_setpviv_mg
               Like "sv_setpviv", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_setpviv_mg(SV *const sv, const IV iv)

       sv_setpvn
               Copies  a string into an SV.  The "len" parameter indicates the number of bytes to be copied.  If
               the "ptr" argument is NULL the SV will become undefined.   Does  not  handle  'set'  magic.   See
               "sv_setpvn_mg".

                       void    sv_setpvn(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr,
                                         const STRLEN len)

       sv_setpvn_mg
               Like "sv_setpvn", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_setpvn_mg(SV *const sv,
                                            const char *const ptr,
                                            const STRLEN len)

       sv_setpvs
               Like "sv_setpvn", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       void    sv_setpvs(SV* sv, const char* s)

       sv_setpvs_mg
               Like "sv_setpvn_mg", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       void    sv_setpvs_mg(SV* sv, const char* s)

       sv_setpv_mg
               Like "sv_setpv", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_setpv_mg(SV *const sv, const char *const ptr)

       sv_setref_iv
               Copies  an integer into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV.  The "rv" argument will be upgraded
               to an RV.  That RV will be modified to point to the new SV.  The "classname"  argument  indicates
               the  package for the blessing.  Set "classname" to "NULL" to avoid the blessing.  The new SV will
               have a reference count of 1, and the RV will be returned.

                       SV*     sv_setref_iv(SV *const rv,
                                            const char *const classname,
                                            const IV iv)

       sv_setref_nv
               Copies a double into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV.  The "rv" argument will be upgraded to
               an RV.  That RV will be modified to point to the new SV.  The "classname" argument indicates  the
               package for the blessing.  Set "classname" to "NULL" to avoid the blessing.  The new SV will have
               a reference count of 1, and the RV will be returned.

                       SV*     sv_setref_nv(SV *const rv,
                                            const char *const classname,
                                            const NV nv)

       sv_setref_pv
               Copies  a  pointer into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV.  The "rv" argument will be upgraded
               to an RV.  That RV will be modified to point to the new SV.  If the "pv" argument  is  NULL  then
               "PL_sv_undef" will be placed into the SV.  The "classname" argument indicates the package for the
               blessing.   Set  "classname"  to  "NULL" to avoid the blessing.  The new SV will have a reference
               count of 1, and the RV will be returned.

               Do not use with other Perl types such as HV, AV,  SV,  CV,  because  those  objects  will  become
               corrupted by the pointer copy process.

               Note that "sv_setref_pvn" copies the string while this copies the pointer.

                       SV*     sv_setref_pv(SV *const rv,
                                            const char *const classname,
                                            void *const pv)

       sv_setref_pvn
               Copies  a  string  into  a  new SV, optionally blessing the SV.  The length of the string must be
               specified with "n".  The "rv" argument will be upgraded to an RV.  That RV will  be  modified  to
               point  to  the  new  SV.   The  "classname" argument indicates the package for the blessing.  Set
               "classname" to "NULL" to avoid the blessing.  The new SV will have a reference count  of  1,  and
               the RV will be returned.

               Note that "sv_setref_pv" copies the pointer while this copies the string.

                       SV*     sv_setref_pvn(SV *const rv,
                                             const char *const classname,
                                             const char *const pv,
                                             const STRLEN n)

       sv_setref_pvs
               Like "sv_setref_pvn", but takes a literal string instead of a string/length pair.

                       SV *    sv_setref_pvs(const char* s)

       sv_setref_uv
               Copies  an unsigned integer into a new SV, optionally blessing the SV.  The "rv" argument will be
               upgraded to an RV.  That RV will be modified to point to the new SV.   The  "classname"  argument
               indicates  the  package  for the blessing.  Set "classname" to "NULL" to avoid the blessing.  The
               new SV will have a reference count of 1, and the RV will be returned.

                       SV*     sv_setref_uv(SV *const rv,
                                            const char *const classname,
                                            const UV uv)

       sv_setsv
               Copies the contents of the source SV "ssv" into the destination SV "dsv".  The source SV  may  be
               destroyed  if it is mortal, so don't use this function if the source SV needs to be reused.  Does
               not handle 'set' magic.  Loosely speaking, it performs a copy-by-value, obliterating any previous
               content of the destination.

               You probably want to use one of the assortment of wrappers, such as "SvSetSV", "SvSetSV_nosteal",
               "SvSetMagicSV" and "SvSetMagicSV_nosteal".

                       void    sv_setsv(SV *dstr, SV *sstr)

       sv_setsv_flags
               Copies the contents of the source SV "ssv" into the destination SV "dsv".  The source SV  may  be
               destroyed  if it is mortal, so don't use this function if the source SV needs to be reused.  Does
               not handle 'set' magic.  Loosely speaking, it performs a copy-by-value, obliterating any previous
               content of the destination.  If the "flags" parameter has the "SV_GMAGIC" bit set, will  "mg_get"
               on  "ssv"  if appropriate, else not.  If the "flags" parameter has the "NOSTEAL" bit set then the
               buffers of temps will not be stolen.  <sv_setsv> and "sv_setsv_nomg" are implemented in terms  of
               this function.

               You probably want to use one of the assortment of wrappers, such as "SvSetSV", "SvSetSV_nosteal",
               "SvSetMagicSV" and "SvSetMagicSV_nosteal".

               This  is  the  primary function for copying scalars, and most other copy-ish functions and macros
               use this underneath.

                       void    sv_setsv_flags(SV *dstr, SV *sstr,
                                              const I32 flags)

       sv_setsv_mg
               Like "sv_setsv", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_setsv_mg(SV *const dstr, SV *const sstr)

       sv_setuv
               Copies an unsigned integer into the given SV, upgrading first  if  necessary.   Does  not  handle
               'set' magic.  See also "sv_setuv_mg".

                       void    sv_setuv(SV *const sv, const UV num)

       sv_setuv_mg
               Like "sv_setuv", but also handles 'set' magic.

                       void    sv_setuv_mg(SV *const sv, const UV u)

       sv_tainted
               Test an SV for taintedness.  Use "SvTAINTED" instead.

                       bool    sv_tainted(SV *const sv)

       sv_true Returns  true  if the SV has a true value by Perl's rules.  Use the "SvTRUE" macro instead, which
               may call "sv_true()" or may instead use an in-line version.

                       I32     sv_true(SV *const sv)

       sv_unmagic
               Removes all magic of type "type" from an SV.

                       int     sv_unmagic(SV *const sv, const int type)

       sv_unmagicext
               Removes all magic of type "type" with the specified "vtbl" from an SV.

                       int     sv_unmagicext(SV *const sv, const int type,
                                             MGVTBL *vtbl)

       sv_unref_flags
               Unsets the RV status of the SV,  and  decrements  the  reference  count  of  whatever  was  being
               referenced  by  the  RV.  This can almost be thought of as a reversal of "newSVrv".  The "cflags"
               argument can contain  "SV_IMMEDIATE_UNREF"  to  force  the  reference  count  to  be  decremented
               (otherwise the decrementing is conditional on the reference count being different from one or the
               reference being a readonly SV).  See "SvROK_off".

                       void    sv_unref_flags(SV *const ref, const U32 flags)

       sv_untaint
               Untaint an SV.  Use "SvTAINTED_off" instead.

                       void    sv_untaint(SV *const sv)

       sv_upgrade
               Upgrade  an  SV  to  a  more complex form.  Generally adds a new body type to the SV, then copies
               across as much information as possible from the old body.  It croaks if the SV is  already  in  a
               more complex form than requested.  You generally want to use the "SvUPGRADE" macro wrapper, which
               checks the type before calling "sv_upgrade", and hence does not croak.  See also "svtype".

                       void    sv_upgrade(SV *const sv, svtype new_type)

       sv_usepvn_flags
               Tells  an  SV to use "ptr" to find its string value.  Normally the string is stored inside the SV
               but sv_usepvn allows the SV to use an outside string.  The "ptr" should point to memory that  was
               allocated by "malloc".  It must be the start of a mallocked block of memory, and not a pointer to
               the  middle  of  it.   The string length, "len", must be supplied.  By default this function will
               realloc (i.e. move) the memory pointed to by "ptr", so that pointer should not be freed  or  used
               by  the  programmer  after  giving it to sv_usepvn, and neither should any pointers from "behind"
               that pointer (e.g. ptr + 1) be used.

               If "flags" & SV_SMAGIC is true, will call SvSETMAGIC.  If "flags" & SV_HAS_TRAILING_NUL is  true,
               then  "ptr[len]"  must  be  NUL,  and the realloc will be skipped (i.e. the buffer is actually at
               least 1 byte longer than "len", and already meets the requirements for storing in "SvPVX").

                       void    sv_usepvn_flags(SV *const sv, char* ptr,
                                               const STRLEN len,
                                               const U32 flags)

       sv_utf8_decode
               If the PV of the SV is an octet sequence in UTF-8 and contains  a  multiple-byte  character,  the
               "SvUTF8"  flag  is  turned on so that it looks like a character.  If the PV contains only single-
               byte characters, the "SvUTF8" flag stays off.  Scans PV for validity and returns false if the  PV
               is invalid UTF-8.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       bool    sv_utf8_decode(SV *const sv)

       sv_utf8_downgrade
               Attempts  to  convert  the  PV of an SV from characters to bytes.  If the PV contains a character
               that cannot fit in a byte, this conversion will fail; in this case, either returns false  or,  if
               "fail_ok" is not true, croaks.

               This  is  not  a general purpose Unicode to byte encoding interface: use the Encode extension for
               that.

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       bool    sv_utf8_downgrade(SV *const sv,
                                                 const bool fail_ok)

       sv_utf8_encode
               Converts the PV of an SV to UTF-8, but then turns the "SvUTF8" flag off so  that  it  looks  like
               octets again.

                       void    sv_utf8_encode(SV *const sv)

       sv_utf8_upgrade
               Converts  the  PV  of an SV to its UTF-8-encoded form.  Forces the SV to string form if it is not
               already.  Will "mg_get" on "sv" if appropriate.  Always sets the  SvUTF8  flag  to  avoid  future
               validity  checks  even  if  the  whole string is the same in UTF-8 as not.  Returns the number of
               bytes in the converted string

               This is not a general purpose byte encoding to Unicode interface: use the  Encode  extension  for
               that.

                       STRLEN  sv_utf8_upgrade(SV *sv)

       sv_utf8_upgrade_flags
               Converts  the  PV  of an SV to its UTF-8-encoded form.  Forces the SV to string form if it is not
               already.  Always sets the SvUTF8 flag to avoid future validity checks even if all the  bytes  are
               invariant  in  UTF-8.   If "flags" has "SV_GMAGIC" bit set, will "mg_get" on "sv" if appropriate,
               else  not.   Returns  the  number  of  bytes  in  the  converted  string  "sv_utf8_upgrade"   and
               "sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg" are implemented in terms of this function.

               This  is  not  a general purpose byte encoding to Unicode interface: use the Encode extension for
               that.

                       STRLEN  sv_utf8_upgrade_flags(SV *const sv,
                                                     const I32 flags)

       sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg
               Like sv_utf8_upgrade, but doesn't do magic on "sv".

                       STRLEN  sv_utf8_upgrade_nomg(SV *sv)

       sv_vcatpvf
               Processes its arguments like "vsprintf" and appends the formatted output  to  an  SV.   Does  not
               handle 'set' magic.  See "sv_vcatpvf_mg".

               Usually used via its frontend "sv_catpvf".

                       void    sv_vcatpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
                                          va_list *const args)

       sv_vcatpvfn
                       void    sv_vcatpvfn(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
                                           const STRLEN patlen,
                                           va_list *const args,
                                           SV **const svargs, const I32 svmax,
                                           bool *const maybe_tainted)

       sv_vcatpvfn_flags
               Processes its arguments like "vsprintf" and appends the formatted output to an SV.  Uses an array
               of  SVs  if the C style variable argument list is missing (NULL).  When running with taint checks
               enabled, indicates via "maybe_tainted" if results are untrustworthy (often  due  to  the  use  of
               locales).

               If called as "sv_vcatpvfn" or flags include "SV_GMAGIC", calls get magic.

               Usually used via one of its frontends "sv_vcatpvf" and "sv_vcatpvf_mg".

                       void    sv_vcatpvfn_flags(SV *const sv,
                                                 const char *const pat,
                                                 const STRLEN patlen,
                                                 va_list *const args,
                                                 SV **const svargs,
                                                 const I32 svmax,
                                                 bool *const maybe_tainted,
                                                 const U32 flags)

       sv_vcatpvf_mg
               Like "sv_vcatpvf", but also handles 'set' magic.

               Usually used via its frontend "sv_catpvf_mg".

                       void    sv_vcatpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
                                             const char *const pat,
                                             va_list *const args)

       sv_vsetpvf
               Works like "sv_vcatpvf" but copies the text into the SV instead of appending it.  Does not handle
               'set' magic.  See "sv_vsetpvf_mg".

               Usually used via its frontend "sv_setpvf".

                       void    sv_vsetpvf(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
                                          va_list *const args)

       sv_vsetpvfn
               Works like "sv_vcatpvfn" but copies the text into the SV instead of appending it.

               Usually used via one of its frontends "sv_vsetpvf" and "sv_vsetpvf_mg".

                       void    sv_vsetpvfn(SV *const sv, const char *const pat,
                                           const STRLEN patlen,
                                           va_list *const args,
                                           SV **const svargs, const I32 svmax,
                                           bool *const maybe_tainted)

       sv_vsetpvf_mg
               Like "sv_vsetpvf", but also handles 'set' magic.

               Usually used via its frontend "sv_setpvf_mg".

                       void    sv_vsetpvf_mg(SV *const sv,
                                             const char *const pat,
                                             va_list *const args)

Unicode Support

       bytes_cmp_utf8
               Compares  the  sequence  of  characters  (stored  as  octets) in "b", "blen" with the sequence of
               characters (stored as UTF-8) in "u", "ulen". Returns 0 if they are equal, -1 or -2 if  the  first
               string  is  less  than the second string, +1 or +2 if the first string is greater than the second
               string.

               -1 or +1 is returned if the shorter string was identical to the start of the longer string. -2 or
               +2 is returned if the was a difference between characters within the strings.

                       int     bytes_cmp_utf8(const U8 *b, STRLEN blen,
                                              const U8 *u, STRLEN ulen)

       bytes_from_utf8
               Converts  a  string  "s"  of  length  "len"  from  UTF-8  into  native  byte  encoding.    Unlike
               "utf8_to_bytes"  but  like  "bytes_to_utf8",  returns  a pointer to the newly-created string, and
               updates "len" to contain the new length.  Returns the original string if  no  conversion  occurs,
               "len"  is unchanged. Do nothing if "is_utf8" points to 0. Sets "is_utf8" to 0 if "s" is converted
               or consisted entirely of characters that are invariant in  utf8  (i.e.,  US-ASCII  on  non-EBCDIC
               machines).

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       U8*     bytes_from_utf8(const U8 *s, STRLEN *len,
                                               bool *is_utf8)

       bytes_to_utf8
               Converts  a  string  "s"  of  length  "len" bytes from the native encoding into UTF-8.  Returns a
               pointer to the newly-created string, and sets "len" to reflect the new length in bytes.

               A NUL character will be written after the end of the string.

               If you want to convert to UTF-8 from encodings other than the  native  (Latin1  or  EBCDIC),  see
               "sv_recode_to_utf8"().

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       U8*     bytes_to_utf8(const U8 *s, STRLEN *len)

       foldEQ_utf8
               Returns true if the leading portions of the strings "s1" and "s2" (either or both of which may be
               in  UTF-8) are the same case-insensitively; false otherwise.  How far into the strings to compare
               is determined by other input parameters.

               If "u1" is true, the string "s1" is assumed to be  in  UTF-8-encoded  Unicode;  otherwise  it  is
               assumed to be in native 8-bit encoding.  Correspondingly for "u2" with respect to "s2".

               If  the  byte  length "l1" is non-zero, it says how far into "s1" to check for fold equality.  In
               other words, "s1"+"l1" will be used as a goal to reach.  The scan will not be considered to be  a
               match  unless  the  goal is reached, and scanning won't continue past that goal.  Correspondingly
               for "l2" with respect to "s2".

               If "pe1" is non-NULL and the pointer it points to is not NULL, that pointer is considered an  end
               pointer  to  the  position  1  byte past the maximum point in "s1" beyond which scanning will not
               continue under any circumstances.  (This routine assumes that UTF-8 encoded input strings are not
               malformed; malformed input can cause it to read past "pe1").  This means that if  both  "l1"  and
               "pe1" are specified, and "pe1" is less than "s1"+"l1", the match will never be successful because
               it can never get as far as its goal (and in fact is asserted against).  Correspondingly for "pe2"
               with respect to "s2".

               At  least one of "s1" and "s2" must have a goal (at least one of "l1" and "l2" must be non-zero),
               and if both do, both have to be reached for  a  successful  match.    Also,  if  the  fold  of  a
               character  is  multiple  characters,  all  of  them must be matched (see tr21 reference below for
               'folding').

               Upon a successful match, if "pe1" is non-NULL, it will be set to point to the  beginning  of  the
               next character of "s1" beyond what was matched.  Correspondingly for "pe2" and "s2".

               For  case-insensitiveness, the "casefolding" of Unicode is used instead of upper/lowercasing both
               the characters, see <http://www.unicode.org/unicode/reports/tr21/> (Case Mappings).

                       I32     foldEQ_utf8(const char *s1, char **pe1, UV l1,
                                           bool u1, const char *s2, char **pe2,
                                           UV l2, bool u2)

       is_ascii_string
               Returns true if the first "len" bytes of the string "s" are the same whether or not the string is
               encoded in UTF-8 (or UTF-EBCDIC on EBCDIC machines).  That is, if they are invariant.  On  ASCII-
               ish machines, only ASCII characters fit this definition, hence the function's name.

               If "len" is 0, it will be calculated using strlen(s).

               See also "is_utf8_string"(), "is_utf8_string_loclen"(), and "is_utf8_string_loc"().

                       bool    is_ascii_string(const U8 *s, STRLEN len)

       is_utf8_char
               DEPRECATED!

               Tests  if  some  arbitrary  number  of  bytes  begins  in  a valid UTF-8 character.  Note that an
               INVARIANT (i.e. ASCII on non-EBCDIC machines) character is a valid UTF-8 character.   The  actual
               number of bytes in the UTF-8 character will be returned if it is valid, otherwise 0.

               This  function  is  deprecated  due  to  the possibility that malformed input could cause reading
               beyond the end of the input buffer.  Use "is_utf8_char_buf" instead.

                       STRLEN  is_utf8_char(const U8 *s)

       is_utf8_char_buf
               Returns the number of bytes that comprise the first UTF-8  encoded  character  in  buffer  "buf".
               "buf_end" should point to one position beyond the end of the buffer.  0 is returned if "buf" does
               not point to a complete, valid UTF-8 encoded character.

               Note that an INVARIANT character (i.e. ASCII on non-EBCDIC machines) is a valid UTF-8 character.

                       STRLEN  is_utf8_char_buf(const U8 *buf,
                                                const U8 *buf_end)

       is_utf8_string
               Returns  true  if the first "len" bytes of string "s" form a valid UTF-8 string, false otherwise.
               If "len" is 0, it will be calculated using strlen(s) (which means if you use  this  option,  that
               "s"  has  to  have  a  terminating NUL byte).  Note that all characters being ASCII constitute 'a
               valid UTF-8 string'.

               See also "is_ascii_string"(), "is_utf8_string_loclen"(), and "is_utf8_string_loc"().

                       bool    is_utf8_string(const U8 *s, STRLEN len)

       is_utf8_string_loc
               Like "is_utf8_string" but stores the location of the failure (in the case of "utf8ness  failure")
               or the location "s"+"len" (in the case of "utf8ness success") in the "ep".

               See also "is_utf8_string_loclen"() and "is_utf8_string"().

                       bool    is_utf8_string_loc(const U8 *s, STRLEN len,
                                                  const U8 **ep)

       is_utf8_string_loclen
               Like  "is_utf8_string"()  but  stores  the  location  of  the  failure  (in the case of "utf8ness
               failure") or the location "s"+"len" (in the case of "utf8ness success")  in  the  "ep",  and  the
               number of UTF-8 encoded characters in the "el".

               See also "is_utf8_string_loc"() and "is_utf8_string"().

                       bool    is_utf8_string_loclen(const U8 *s, STRLEN len,
                                                     const U8 **ep, STRLEN *el)

       pv_uni_display
               Build  to  the  scalar  "dsv"  a  displayable  version  of  the  string  "spv", length "len", the
               displayable version being at most "pvlim" bytes long (if longer, the rest is truncated and  "..."
               will be appended).

               The  "flags"  argument  can  have  UNI_DISPLAY_ISPRINT set to display isPRINT()able characters as
               themselves, UNI_DISPLAY_BACKSLASH to display the \\[nrfta\\] as the  backslashed  versions  (like
               '\n')  (UNI_DISPLAY_BACKSLASH is preferred over UNI_DISPLAY_ISPRINT for \\).  UNI_DISPLAY_QQ (and
               its alias UNI_DISPLAY_REGEX) have both UNI_DISPLAY_BACKSLASH and UNI_DISPLAY_ISPRINT turned on.

               The pointer to the PV of the "dsv" is returned.

                       char*   pv_uni_display(SV *dsv, const U8 *spv,
                                              STRLEN len, STRLEN pvlim,
                                              UV flags)

       sv_cat_decode
               The encoding is assumed to be an Encode object, the PV of the ssv is assumed to be octets in that
               encoding and decoding the input starts from the position which (PV + *offset)  pointed  to.   The
               dsv  will  be  concatenated  the decoded UTF-8 string from ssv.  Decoding will terminate when the
               string tstr appears in decoding output or the input ends on the PV of the ssv.  The  value  which
               the offset points will be modified to the last input position on the ssv.

               Returns TRUE if the terminator was found, else returns FALSE.

                       bool    sv_cat_decode(SV* dsv, SV *encoding, SV *ssv,
                                             int *offset, char* tstr, int tlen)

       sv_recode_to_utf8
               The encoding is assumed to be an Encode object, on entry the PV of the sv is assumed to be octets
               in that encoding, and the sv will be converted into Unicode (and UTF-8).

               If  the sv already is UTF-8 (or if it is not POK), or if the encoding is not a reference, nothing
               is done to the sv.  If the encoding is not an  "Encode::XS"  Encoding  object,  bad  things  will
               happen.  (See lib/encoding.pm and Encode.)

               The PV of the sv is returned.

                       char*   sv_recode_to_utf8(SV* sv, SV *encoding)

       sv_uni_display
               Build to the scalar "dsv" a displayable version of the scalar "sv", the displayable version being
               at most "pvlim" bytes long (if longer, the rest is truncated and "..." will be appended).

               The "flags" argument is as in "pv_uni_display"().

               The pointer to the PV of the "dsv" is returned.

                       char*   sv_uni_display(SV *dsv, SV *ssv, STRLEN pvlim,
                                              UV flags)

       to_utf8_case
               The  "p" contains the pointer to the UTF-8 string encoding the character that is being converted.
               This routine assumes that the character at "p" is well-formed.

               The "ustrp" is a pointer to the character buffer to put the conversion result to.  The "lenp"  is
               a pointer to the length of the result.

               The "swashp" is a pointer to the swash to use.

               Both the special and normal mappings are stored in lib/unicore/To/Foo.pl, and loaded by SWASHNEW,
               using  lib/utf8_heavy.pl.   The "special" (usually, but not always, a multicharacter mapping), is
               tried first.

               The "special" is a string like "utf8::ToSpecLower", which means the hash %utf8::ToSpecLower.  The
               access to the hash is through Perl_to_utf8_case().

               The "normal" is a string like "ToLower" which means the swash %utf8::ToLower.

                       UV      to_utf8_case(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
                                            STRLEN *lenp, SV **swashp,
                                            const char *normal,
                                            const char *special)

       to_utf8_fold
               Convert the UTF-8 encoded character at "p" to its foldcase version and store  that  in  UTF-8  in
               "ustrp"  and  its  length  in  bytes  in  "lenp".   Note  that  the  "ustrp" needs to be at least
               UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1 bytes since the foldcase version may be longer than the  original  character
               (up to three characters).

               The  first  character  of  the  foldcased version is returned (but note, as explained above, that
               there may be more.)

               The character at "p" is assumed by this routine to be well-formed.

                       UV      to_utf8_fold(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
                                            STRLEN *lenp)

       to_utf8_lower
               Convert the UTF-8 encoded character at "p" to its lowercase version and store that  in  UTF-8  in
               ustrp  and  its  length  in  bytes  in  "lenp".   Note  that  the  "ustrp"  needs  to be at least
               UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1 bytes since the lowercase version may be longer than the original character.

               The first character of the lowercased version is returned (but note,  as  explained  above,  that
               there may be more.)

               The character at "p" is assumed by this routine to be well-formed.

                       UV      to_utf8_lower(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
                                             STRLEN *lenp)

       to_utf8_title
               Convert  the  UTF-8  encoded character at "p" to its titlecase version and store that in UTF-8 in
               "ustrp" and its length in bytes  in  "lenp".   Note  that  the  "ustrp"  needs  to  be  at  least
               UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1 bytes since the titlecase version may be longer than the original character.

               The  first  character  of  the titlecased version is returned (but note, as explained above, that
               there may be more.)

               The character at "p" is assumed by this routine to be well-formed.

                       UV      to_utf8_title(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
                                             STRLEN *lenp)

       to_utf8_upper
               Convert the UTF-8 encoded character at "p" to its uppercase version and store that  in  UTF-8  in
               "ustrp"  and  its  length  in  bytes  in  "lenp".   Note  that  the  ustrp  needs  to be at least
               UTF8_MAXBYTES_CASE+1 bytes since the uppercase version may be longer than the original character.

               The first character of the uppercased version is returned (but note,  as  explained  above,  that
               there may be more.)

               The character at "p" is assumed by this routine to be well-formed.

                       UV      to_utf8_upper(const U8 *p, U8* ustrp,
                                             STRLEN *lenp)

       utf8n_to_uvchr
               Returns  the  native character value of the first character in the string "s" which is assumed to
               be in UTF-8 encoding; "retlen" will be set to the length, in bytes, of that character.

               "length" and "flags" are the same as "utf8n_to_uvuni"().

                       UV      utf8n_to_uvchr(const U8 *s, STRLEN curlen,
                                              STRLEN *retlen, U32 flags)

       utf8n_to_uvuni
               Bottom level UTF-8 decode routine.  Returns the code point value of the first  character  in  the
               string "s", which is assumed to be in UTF-8 (or UTF-EBCDIC) encoding, and no longer than "curlen"
               bytes; *retlen (if "retlen" isn't NULL) will be set to the length, in bytes, of that character.

               The  value  of  "flags"  determines  the  behavior when "s" does not point to a well-formed UTF-8
               character.  If "flags" is 0, when a malformation is found, zero is returned and *retlen is set so
               that ("s" + *retlen) is the next possible position  in  "s"  that  could  begin  a  non-malformed
               character.  Also, if UTF-8 warnings haven't been lexically disabled, a warning is raised.

               Various  ALLOW  flags  can  be  set  in  "flags"  to  allow (and not warn on) individual types of
               malformations, such as the sequence being overlong (that is, when there  is  a  shorter  sequence
               that  can  express  the  same code point; overlong sequences are expressly forbidden in the UTF-8
               standard due to potential security issues).  Another malformation example is the first byte of  a
               character  not  being  a legal first byte.  See utf8.h for the list of such flags.  For allowed 0
               length strings, this function returns 0; for allowed overlong sequences, the computed code  point
               is  returned; for all other allowed malformations, the Unicode REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned,
               as these have no determinable reasonable value.

               The UTF8_CHECK_ONLY flag overrides the behavior when a non-allowed (by other flags)  malformation
               is  found.   If  this  flag is set, the routine assumes that the caller will raise a warning, and
               this function will silently just set "retlen" to "-1" (cast to "STRLEN") and return zero.

               Note that this API requires disambiguation between successful decoding a NUL  character,  and  an
               error  return  (unless  the  UTF8_CHECK_ONLY  flag  is set), as in both cases, 0 is returned.  To
               disambiguate, upon a zero return, see if the first byte of "s" is 0 as well.  If  so,  the  input
               was a NUL; if not, the input had an error.

               Certain  code  points  are  considered  problematic.   These are Unicode surrogates, Unicode non-
               characters, and code points above  the  Unicode  maximum  of  0x10FFFF.   By  default  these  are
               considered  regular  code  points,  but certain situations warrant special handling for them.  If
               "flags"  contains  UTF8_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE,  all   three   classes   are   treated   as
               malformations and handled as such.  The flags UTF8_DISALLOW_SURROGATE, UTF8_DISALLOW_NONCHAR, and
               UTF8_DISALLOW_SUPER  (meaning  above  the  legal  Unicode  maximum)  can be set to disallow these
               categories individually.

               The   flags   UTF8_WARN_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE,    UTF8_WARN_SURROGATE,    UTF8_WARN_NONCHAR,    and
               UTF8_WARN_SUPER  will  cause  warning  messages to be raised for their respective categories, but
               otherwise the code points are considered valid (not malformations).  To get a category to both be
               treated as a malformation and raise a warning, specify both the WARN and  DISALLOW  flags.   (But
               note  that  warnings  are  not  raised  if  lexically  disabled  nor  if  UTF8_CHECK_ONLY is also
               specified.)

               Very large code points (above 0x7FFF_FFFF) are considered more problematic than the  others  that
               are  above the Unicode legal maximum.  There are several reasons: they requre at least 32 bits to
               represent them on ASCII platforms, are not representable at all  on  EBCDIC  platforms,  and  the
               original UTF-8 specification never went above this number (the current 0x10FFFF limit was imposed
               later).   (The  smaller  ones,  those  that  fit into 32 bits, are representable by a UV on ASCII
               platforms, but not by an IV, which means that the number of operations that can be  performed  on
               them  is  quite  restricted.)   The UTF-8 encoding on ASCII platforms for these large code points
               begins with a byte containing 0xFE or 0xFF.  The UTF8_DISALLOW_FE_FF flag will cause them  to  be
               treated  as  malformations,  while  allowing  smaller  above-Unicode  code  points.   (Of  course
               UTF8_DISALLOW_SUPER will treat all above-Unicode code points, including these, as malformations.)
               Similarly, UTF8_WARN_FE_FF acts just like the other WARN flags, but applies just  to  these  code
               points.

               All other code points corresponding to Unicode characters, including private use and those yet to
               be assigned, are never considered malformed and never warn.

               Most code should use "utf8_to_uvchr_buf"() rather than call this directly.

                       UV      utf8n_to_uvuni(const U8 *s, STRLEN curlen,
                                              STRLEN *retlen, U32 flags)

       utf8_distance
               Returns the number of UTF-8 characters between the UTF-8 pointers "a" and "b".

               WARNING: use only if you *know* that the pointers point inside the same UTF-8 buffer.

                       IV      utf8_distance(const U8 *a, const U8 *b)

       utf8_hop
               Return the UTF-8 pointer "s" displaced by "off" characters, either forward or backward.

               WARNING:  do not use the following unless you *know* "off" is within the UTF-8 data pointed to by
               "s" *and* that on entry "s" is aligned on the first byte of character or just after the last byte
               of a character.

                       U8*     utf8_hop(const U8 *s, I32 off)

       utf8_length
               Return the length of the UTF-8 char encoded string "s" in characters.  Stops at "e"  (inclusive).
               If "e < s" or if the scan would end up past "e", croaks.

                       STRLEN  utf8_length(const U8* s, const U8 *e)

       utf8_to_bytes
               Converts   a  string  "s"  of  length  "len"  from  UTF-8  into  native  byte  encoding.   Unlike
               "bytes_to_utf8", this over-writes the original string, and  updates  "len"  to  contain  the  new
               length.  Returns zero on failure, setting "len" to -1.

               If you need a copy of the string, see "bytes_from_utf8".

               NOTE: this function is experimental and may change or be removed without notice.

                       U8*     utf8_to_bytes(U8 *s, STRLEN *len)

       utf8_to_uvchr
               DEPRECATED!

               Returns  the native code point of the first character in the string "s" which is assumed to be in
               UTF-8 encoding; "retlen" will be set to the length, in bytes, of that character.

               Some, but not all, UTF-8 malformations are detected, and in  fact,  some  malformed  input  could
               cause  reading beyond the end of the input buffer, which is why this function is deprecated.  Use
               "utf8_to_uvchr_buf" instead.

               If "s" points to one of the detected malformations,  and  UTF8  warnings  are  enabled,  zero  is
               returned  and  *retlen  is  set  (if  "retlen" isn't NULL) to -1.  If those warnings are off, the
               computed value if well-defined (or  the  Unicode  REPLACEMENT  CHARACTER,  if  not)  is  silently
               returned,  and  *retlen  is  set  (if  "retlen"  isn't  NULL) so that ("s" + *retlen) is the next
               possible position in "s" that could begin a non-malformed character.   See  "utf8n_to_uvuni"  for
               details on when the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned.

                       UV      utf8_to_uvchr(const U8 *s, STRLEN *retlen)

       utf8_to_uvchr_buf
               Returns  the native code point of the first character in the string "s" which is assumed to be in
               UTF-8 encoding; "send" points to 1 beyond the end of "s".  *retlen will be set to the length,  in
               bytes, of that character.

               If  "s"  does  not  point to a well-formed UTF-8 character and UTF8 warnings are enabled, zero is
               returned and *retlen is set (if "retlen" isn't NULL) to -1.   If  those  warnings  are  off,  the
               computed  value,  if  well-defined  (or  the  Unicode  REPLACEMENT CHARACTER if not), is silently
               returned, and *retlen is set (if "retlen"  isn't  NULL)  so  that  ("s" + *retlen)  is  the  next
               possible  position  in  "s" that could begin a non-malformed character.  See "utf8n_to_uvuni" for
               details on when the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned.

                       UV      utf8_to_uvchr_buf(const U8 *s, const U8 *send,
                                                 STRLEN *retlen)

       utf8_to_uvuni
               DEPRECATED!

               Returns the Unicode code point of the first character in the string "s" which is assumed to be in
               UTF-8 encoding; "retlen" will be set to the length, in bytes, of that character.

               This function should only be used when the returned UV is considered an index  into  the  Unicode
               semantic tables (e.g. swashes).

               Some,  but  not  all,  UTF-8  malformations are detected, and in fact, some malformed input could
               cause reading beyond the end of the input buffer, which is why this function is deprecated.   Use
               "utf8_to_uvuni_buf" instead.

               If  "s"  points  to  one  of  the  detected malformations, and UTF8 warnings are enabled, zero is
               returned and *retlen is set (if "retlen" doesn't point to NULL) to -1.   If  those  warnings  are
               off,  the  computed  value  if  well-defined  (or  the  Unicode REPLACEMENT CHARACTER, if not) is
               silently returned, and *retlen is set (if "retlen" isn't NULL) so  that  ("s" + *retlen)  is  the
               next  possible  position in "s" that could begin a non-malformed character.  See "utf8n_to_uvuni"
               for details on when the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned.

                       UV      utf8_to_uvuni(const U8 *s, STRLEN *retlen)

       utf8_to_uvuni_buf
               Returns the Unicode code point of the first character in the string "s" which is assumed to be in
               UTF-8 encoding; "send" points to 1 beyond the end of "s".  "retlen" will be set to the length, in
               bytes, of that character.

               This function should only be used when the returned UV is considered an index  into  the  Unicode
               semantic tables (e.g. swashes).

               If  "s"  does  not  point to a well-formed UTF-8 character and UTF8 warnings are enabled, zero is
               returned and *retlen is set (if "retlen" isn't NULL) to -1.   If  those  warnings  are  off,  the
               computed  value  if  well-defined  (or  the  Unicode  REPLACEMENT  CHARACTER, if not) is silently
               returned, and *retlen is set (if "retlen"  isn't  NULL)  so  that  ("s" + *retlen)  is  the  next
               possible  position  in  "s" that could begin a non-malformed character.  See "utf8n_to_uvuni" for
               details on when the REPLACEMENT CHARACTER is returned.

                       UV      utf8_to_uvuni_buf(const U8 *s, const U8 *send,
                                                 STRLEN *retlen)

       uvchr_to_utf8
               Adds the UTF-8 representation of the Native code point "uv" to the end of  the  string  "d";  "d"
               should  have  at least "UTF8_MAXBYTES+1" free bytes available. The return value is the pointer to
               the byte after the end of the new character. In other words,

                   d = uvchr_to_utf8(d, uv);

               is the recommended wide native character-aware way of saying

                   *(d++) = uv;

                       U8*     uvchr_to_utf8(U8 *d, UV uv)

       uvuni_to_utf8_flags
               Adds the UTF-8 representation of the Unicode code point "uv" to the end of the  string  "d";  "d"
               should  have  at least "UTF8_MAXBYTES+1" free bytes available. The return value is the pointer to
               the byte after the end of the new character. In other words,

                   d = uvuni_to_utf8_flags(d, uv, flags);

               or, in most cases,

                   d = uvuni_to_utf8(d, uv);

               (which is equivalent to)

                   d = uvuni_to_utf8_flags(d, uv, 0);

               This is the recommended Unicode-aware way of saying

                   *(d++) = uv;

               where uv is a code point expressed in Latin-1 or above, not the platform's native character  set.
               Almost all code should instead use "uvchr_to_utf8" or "uvchr_to_utf8_flags".

               This  function will convert to UTF-8 (and not warn) even code points that aren't legal Unicode or
               are problematic, unless "flags" contains one or more of the following flags:

               If "uv" is a Unicode surrogate code point and UNICODE_WARN_SURROGATE is set,  the  function  will
               raise  a  warning,  provided UTF8 warnings are enabled.  If instead UNICODE_DISALLOW_SURROGATE is
               set, the function will fail and return NULL.  If both flags are set, the function will both  warn
               and return NULL.

               The  UNICODE_WARN_NONCHAR  and  UNICODE_DISALLOW_NONCHAR  flags  correspondingly  affect  how the
               function  handles  a  Unicode  non-character.    And   likewise,   the   UNICODE_WARN_SUPER   and
               UNICODE_DISALLOW_SUPER  flags,  affect  the  handling  of  code points that are above the Unicode
               maximum of 0x10FFFF.  Code points above 0x7FFF_FFFF (which are even less portable) can be  warned
               and/or  disallowed even if other above-Unicode code points are accepted by the UNICODE_WARN_FE_FF
               and UNICODE_DISALLOW_FE_FF flags.

               And finally, the flag UNICODE_WARN_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE selects all four of the above WARN  flags;
               and UNICODE_DISALLOW_ILLEGAL_INTERCHANGE selects all four DISALLOW flags.

                       U8*     uvuni_to_utf8_flags(U8 *d, UV uv, UV flags)

Variables created by "xsubpp" and "xsubpp" internal functions

       ax      Variable  which  is  setup  by  "xsubpp"  to  indicate  the  stack base offset, used by the "ST",
               "XSprePUSH" and "XSRETURN" macros.  The "dMARK" macro must be called prior to  setup  the  "MARK"
               variable.

                       I32     ax

       CLASS   Variable which is setup by "xsubpp" to indicate the class name for a C++ XS constructor.  This is
               always a "char*".  See "THIS".

                       char*   CLASS

       dAX     Sets  up  the  "ax"  variable.   This  is  usually  handled  automatically by "xsubpp" by calling
               "dXSARGS".

                               dAX;

       dAXMARK Sets  up  the  "ax"  variable  and  stack  marker  variable  "mark".   This  is  usually  handled
               automatically by "xsubpp" by calling "dXSARGS".

                               dAXMARK;

       dITEMS  Sets  up  the  "items"  variable.   This  is usually handled automatically by "xsubpp" by calling
               "dXSARGS".

                               dITEMS;

       dUNDERBAR
               Sets up any variable needed by the "UNDERBAR" macro. It used to define  "padoff_du",  but  it  is
               currently  a  noop.  However, it is strongly advised to still use it for ensuring past and future
               compatibility.

                               dUNDERBAR;

       dXSARGS Sets up stack and mark pointers for an XSUB, calling dSP and dMARK.  Sets up the "ax" and "items"
               variables by calling "dAX" and "dITEMS".  This is usually handled automatically by "xsubpp".

                               dXSARGS;

       dXSI32  Sets up the "ix" variable for an XSUB which has aliases.  This is usually  handled  automatically
               by "xsubpp".

                               dXSI32;

       items   Variable which is setup by "xsubpp" to indicate the number of items on the stack.  See "Variable-
               length Parameter Lists" in perlxs.

                       I32     items

       ix      Variable which is setup by "xsubpp" to indicate which of an XSUB's aliases was used to invoke it.
               See "The ALIAS: Keyword" in perlxs.

                       I32     ix

       newXSproto
               Used by "xsubpp" to hook up XSUBs as Perl subs.  Adds Perl prototypes to the subs.

       RETVAL  Variable  which  is  setup  by  "xsubpp" to hold the return value for an XSUB. This is always the
               proper type for the XSUB. See "The RETVAL Variable" in perlxs.

                       (whatever)      RETVAL

       ST      Used to access elements on the XSUB's stack.

                       SV*     ST(int ix)

       THIS    Variable which is setup by "xsubpp" to designate the object in a C++ XSUB.  This  is  always  the
               proper type for the C++ object.  See "CLASS" and "Using XS With C++" in perlxs.

                       (whatever)      THIS

       UNDERBAR
               The SV* corresponding to the $_ variable. Works even if there is a lexical $_ in scope.

       XS      Macro  to  declare an XSUB and its C parameter list.  This is handled by "xsubpp". It is the same
               as using the more explicit XS_EXTERNAL macro.

       XS_APIVERSION_BOOTCHECK
               Macro to verify that the perl api version an XS module has been compiled against matches the  api
               version of the perl interpreter it's being loaded into.

                               XS_APIVERSION_BOOTCHECK;

       XS_EXTERNAL
               Macro to declare an XSUB and its C parameter list explicitly exporting the symbols.

       XS_INTERNAL
               Macro to declare an XSUB and its C parameter list without exporting the symbols.  This is handled
               by "xsubpp" and generally preferable over exporting the XSUB symbols unnecessarily.

       XS_VERSION
               The   version   identifier   for  an  XS  module.   This  is  usually  handled  automatically  by
               "ExtUtils::MakeMaker".  See "XS_VERSION_BOOTCHECK".

       XS_VERSION_BOOTCHECK
               Macro to verify that a PM  module's  $VERSION  variable  matches  the  XS  module's  "XS_VERSION"
               variable.  This is usually handled automatically by "xsubpp".  See "The VERSIONCHECK: Keyword" in
               perlxs.

                               XS_VERSION_BOOTCHECK;

Warning and Dieing

       croak   This is an XS interface to Perl's "die" function.

               Take  a  sprintf-style  format  pattern  and  argument list.  These are used to generate a string
               message.  If the message does not end with  a  newline,  then  it  will  be  extended  with  some
               indication of the current location in the code, as described for "mess_sv".

               The  error  message  will  be  used  as an exception, by default returning control to the nearest
               enclosing "eval", but subject to modification by a  $SIG{__DIE__}  handler.   In  any  case,  the
               "croak" function never returns normally.

               For  historical  reasons,  if  "pat" is null then the contents of "ERRSV" ($@) will be used as an
               error message or object instead of building an error message from  arguments.   If  you  want  to
               throw  a  non-string object, or build an error message in an SV yourself, it is preferable to use
               the "croak_sv" function, which does not involve clobbering "ERRSV".

                       void    croak(const char *pat, ...)

       croak_no_modify
               Exactly equivalent to "Perl_croak(aTHX_ "%s", PL_no_modify)", but generates  terser  object  code
               than using "Perl_croak". Less code used on exception code paths reduces CPU cache pressure.

                       void    croak_no_modify()

       croak_sv
               This is an XS interface to Perl's "die" function.

               "baseex" is the error message or object.  If it is a reference, it will be used as-is.  Otherwise
               it  is used as a string, and if it does not end with a newline then it will be extended with some
               indication of the current location in the code, as described for "mess_sv".

               The error message or object will be used as an exception, by default  returning  control  to  the
               nearest  enclosing  "eval", but subject to modification by a $SIG{__DIE__} handler.  In any case,
               the "croak_sv" function never returns normally.

               To die with a simple string message, the "croak" function may be more convenient.

                       void    croak_sv(SV *baseex)

       die     Behaves the same as "croak", except for the return type.  It should be used only where the "OP *"
               return type is required.  The function never actually returns.

                       OP *    die(const char *pat, ...)

       die_sv  Behaves the same as "croak_sv", except for the return type.  It should be used only where the "OP
               *" return type is required.  The function never actually returns.

                       OP *    die_sv(SV *baseex)

       vcroak  This is an XS interface to Perl's "die" function.

               "pat" and "args" are a sprintf-style format pattern and encapsulated argument  list.   These  are
               used  to  generate a string message.  If the message does not end with a newline, then it will be
               extended with some indication of the current location in the code, as described for "mess_sv".

               The error message will be used as an exception, by  default  returning  control  to  the  nearest
               enclosing  "eval",  but  subject  to  modification  by a $SIG{__DIE__} handler.  In any case, the
               "croak" function never returns normally.

               For historical reasons, if "pat" is null then the contents of "ERRSV" ($@) will  be  used  as  an
               error  message  or  object  instead  of building an error message from arguments.  If you want to
               throw a non-string object, or build an error message in an SV yourself, it is preferable  to  use
               the "croak_sv" function, which does not involve clobbering "ERRSV".

                       void    vcroak(const char *pat, va_list *args)

       vwarn   This is an XS interface to Perl's "warn" function.

               "pat"  and  "args"  are a sprintf-style format pattern and encapsulated argument list.  These are
               used to generate a string message.  If the message does not end with a newline, then it  will  be
               extended with some indication of the current location in the code, as described for "mess_sv".

               The  error message or object will by default be written to standard error, but this is subject to
               modification by a $SIG{__WARN__} handler.

               Unlike with "vcroak", "pat" is not permitted to be null.

                       void    vwarn(const char *pat, va_list *args)

       warn    This is an XS interface to Perl's "warn" function.

               Take a sprintf-style format pattern and argument list.  These  are  used  to  generate  a  string
               message.   If  the  message  does  not  end  with  a  newline, then it will be extended with some
               indication of the current location in the code, as described for "mess_sv".

               The error message or object will by default be written to standard error, but this is subject  to
               modification by a $SIG{__WARN__} handler.

               Unlike with "croak", "pat" is not permitted to be null.

                       void    warn(const char *pat, ...)

       warn_sv This is an XS interface to Perl's "warn" function.

               "baseex" is the error message or object.  If it is a reference, it will be used as-is.  Otherwise
               it  is used as a string, and if it does not end with a newline then it will be extended with some
               indication of the current location in the code, as described for "mess_sv".

               The error message or object will by default be written to standard error, but this is subject  to
               modification by a $SIG{__WARN__} handler.

               To warn with a simple string message, the "warn" function may be more convenient.

                       void    warn_sv(SV *baseex)

Undocumented functions

       The  following functions have been flagged as part of the public API, but are currently undocumented. Use
       them at your own risk, as the interfaces are subject to change.  Functions that are not  listed  in  this
       document are not intended for public use, and should NOT be used under any circumstances.

       If  you  use  one  of  the undocumented functions below, you may wish to consider creating and submitting
       documentation for it. If your patch is accepted, this will indicate that the interface is stable  (unless
       it is explicitly marked otherwise).

       GetVars
       Gv_AMupdate
       PerlIO_clearerr
       PerlIO_close
       PerlIO_context_layers
       PerlIO_eof
       PerlIO_error
       PerlIO_fileno
       PerlIO_fill
       PerlIO_flush
       PerlIO_get_base
       PerlIO_get_bufsiz
       PerlIO_get_cnt
       PerlIO_get_ptr
       PerlIO_read
       PerlIO_seek
       PerlIO_set_cnt
       PerlIO_set_ptrcnt
       PerlIO_setlinebuf
       PerlIO_stderr
       PerlIO_stdin
       PerlIO_stdout
       PerlIO_tell
       PerlIO_unread
       PerlIO_write
       amagic_call
       amagic_deref_call
       any_dup
       atfork_lock
       atfork_unlock
       av_arylen_p
       av_iter_p
       block_gimme
       call_atexit
       call_list
       calloc
       cast_i32
       cast_iv
       cast_ulong
       cast_uv
       ck_warner
       ck_warner_d
       ckwarn
       ckwarn_d
       clone_params_del
       clone_params_new
       croak_nocontext
       csighandler
       cx_dump
       cx_dup
       cxinc
       deb
       deb_nocontext
       debop
       debprofdump
       debstack
       debstackptrs
       delimcpy
       despatch_signals
       die_nocontext
       dirp_dup
       do_aspawn
       do_binmode
       do_close
       do_gv_dump
       do_gvgv_dump
       do_hv_dump
       do_join
       do_magic_dump
       do_op_dump
       do_open
       do_open9
       do_openn
       do_pmop_dump
       do_spawn
       do_spawn_nowait
       do_sprintf
       do_sv_dump
       doing_taint
       doref
       dounwind
       dowantarray
       dump_all
       dump_eval
       dump_fds
       dump_form
       dump_indent
       dump_mstats
       dump_packsubs
       dump_sub
       dump_vindent
       filter_add
       filter_del
       filter_read
       foldEQ_latin1
       form_nocontext
       fp_dup
       fprintf_nocontext
       free_global_struct
       free_tmps
       get_context
       get_mstats
       get_op_descs
       get_op_names
       get_ppaddr
       get_vtbl
       gp_dup
       gp_free
       gp_ref
       gv_AVadd
       gv_HVadd
       gv_IOadd
       gv_SVadd
       gv_add_by_type
       gv_autoload4
       gv_autoload_pv
       gv_autoload_pvn
       gv_autoload_sv
       gv_check
       gv_dump
       gv_efullname
       gv_efullname3
       gv_efullname4
       gv_fetchfile
       gv_fetchfile_flags
       gv_fetchpv
       gv_fetchpvn_flags
       gv_fetchsv
       gv_fullname
       gv_fullname3
       gv_fullname4
       gv_handler
       gv_name_set
       he_dup
       hek_dup
       hv_common
       hv_common_key_len
       hv_delayfree_ent
       hv_eiter_p
       hv_eiter_set
       hv_free_ent
       hv_ksplit
       hv_name_set
       hv_placeholders_get
       hv_placeholders_p
       hv_placeholders_set
       hv_rand_set
       hv_riter_p
       hv_riter_set
       init_global_struct
       init_i18nl10n
       init_i18nl14n
       init_stacks
       init_tm
       instr
       is_lvalue_sub
       leave_scope
       load_module_nocontext
       magic_dump
       malloc
       markstack_grow
       mess_nocontext
       mfree
       mg_dup
       mg_size
       mini_mktime
       moreswitches
       mro_get_from_name
       mro_get_private_data
       mro_set_mro
       mro_set_private_data
       my_atof
       my_atof2
       my_bcopy
       my_bzero
       my_chsize
       my_cxt_index
       my_cxt_init
       my_dirfd
       my_exit
       my_failure_exit
       my_fflush_all
       my_fork
       my_htonl
       my_lstat
       my_memcmp
       my_memset
       my_ntohl
       my_pclose
       my_popen
       my_popen_list
       my_setenv
       my_socketpair
       my_stat
       my_strftime
       my_strlcat
       my_strlcpy
       my_swap
       newANONATTRSUB
       newANONHASH
       newANONLIST
       newANONSUB
       newATTRSUB
       newAVREF
       newCVREF
       newFORM
       newGVREF
       newGVgen
       newGVgen_flags
       newHVREF
       newHVhv
       newIO
       newMYSUB
       newPROG
       newRV
       newSUB
       newSVREF
       newSVpvf_nocontext
       new_collate
       new_ctype
       new_numeric
       new_stackinfo
       ninstr
       op_dump
       op_free
       op_null
       op_refcnt_lock
       op_refcnt_unlock
       parser_dup
       perl_alloc_using
       perl_clone_using
       pmop_dump
       pop_scope
       pregcomp
       pregexec
       pregfree
       pregfree2
       printf_nocontext
       ptr_table_clear
       ptr_table_fetch
       ptr_table_free
       ptr_table_new
       ptr_table_split
       ptr_table_store
       push_scope
       re_compile
       re_dup_guts
       re_intuit_start
       re_intuit_string
       realloc
       reentrant_free
       reentrant_init
       reentrant_retry
       reentrant_size
       ref
       reg_named_buff_all
       reg_named_buff_exists
       reg_named_buff_fetch
       reg_named_buff_firstkey
       reg_named_buff_nextkey
       reg_named_buff_scalar
       regclass_swash
       regdump
       regdupe_internal
       regexec_flags
       regfree_internal
       reginitcolors
       regnext
       repeatcpy
       rninstr
       rsignal
       rsignal_state
       runops_debug
       runops_standard
       rvpv_dup
       safesyscalloc
       safesysfree
       safesysmalloc
       safesysrealloc
       save_I16
       save_I32
       save_I8
       save_adelete
       save_aelem
       save_aelem_flags
       save_alloc
       save_aptr
       save_ary
       save_bool
       save_clearsv
       save_delete
       save_destructor
       save_destructor_x
       save_freeop
       save_freepv
       save_freesv
       save_generic_pvref
       save_generic_svref
       save_gp
       save_hash
       save_hdelete
       save_helem
       save_helem_flags
       save_hints
       save_hptr
       save_int
       save_item
       save_iv
       save_list
       save_long
       save_mortalizesv
       save_nogv
       save_op
       save_padsv_and_mortalize
       save_pptr
       save_pushi32ptr
       save_pushptr
       save_pushptrptr
       save_re_context
       save_scalar
       save_set_svflags
       save_shared_pvref
       save_sptr
       save_svref
       save_vptr
       savestack_grow
       savestack_grow_cnt
       scan_num
       scan_vstring
       screaminstr
       seed
       set_context
       set_numeric_local
       set_numeric_radix
       set_numeric_standard
       share_hek
       si_dup
       ss_dup
       stack_grow
       start_subparse
       str_to_version
       sv_2iv
       sv_2pv
       sv_2uv
       sv_catpvf_mg_nocontext
       sv_catpvf_nocontext
       sv_dump
       sv_dup
       sv_dup_inc
       sv_peek
       sv_pvn_nomg
       sv_setpvf_mg_nocontext
       sv_setpvf_nocontext
       sv_utf8_upgrade_flags_grow
       swash_fetch
       swash_init
       sys_init
       sys_init3
       sys_intern_clear
       sys_intern_dup
       sys_intern_init
       sys_term
       taint_env
       taint_proper
       tmps_grow
       unlnk
       unsharepvn
       utf16_to_utf8
       utf16_to_utf8_reversed
       uvchr_to_utf8_flags
       uvuni_to_utf8
       vdeb
       vform
       vload_module
       vnewSVpvf
       vwarner
       warn_nocontext
       warner
       warner_nocontext
       whichsig
       whichsig_pv
       whichsig_pvn
       whichsig_sv

AUTHORS

       Until May 1997, this document was maintained by Jeff Okamoto <okamoto@corp.hp.com>.  It is now maintained
       as part of Perl itself.

       With  lots of help and suggestions from Dean Roehrich, Malcolm Beattie, Andreas Koenig, Paul Hudson, Ilya
       Zakharevich, Paul Marquess, Neil Bowers, Matthew Green,  Tim  Bunce,  Spider  Boardman,  Ulrich  Pfeifer,
       Stephen McCamant, and Gurusamy Sarathy.

       API Listing originally by Dean Roehrich <roehrich@cray.com>.

       Updated to be autogenerated from comments in the source by Benjamin Stuhl.

SEE ALSO

       perlguts, perlxs, perlxstut, perlintern

POD ERRORS

       Hey! The above document had some coding errors, which are explained below:

       Around line 8556:
           Unterminated C<...> sequence

perl v5.18.2                                       2018-11-20                                         PERLAPI(1)